JP6739416B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area (also referred to as a "start prize") in a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined amount. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information when a game medium is won in a specific winning area (also referred to as “starting area”) is provided, and identification is performed in the variable display device. There is one configured such that when the display result of the variable display of information becomes the specific display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

The advantageous state means an advantageous state for the player to which a predetermined game value is given. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state of a variable winning means (for example, a special winning opening) is advantageous for a player who easily wins a game medium (big hit gaming state), and is advantageous for the player. Is a state in which a predetermined game value is given, such as a state in which the right is generated, a state in which the prize game medium payout condition is easily established.

In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device displaying the symbol as the identification information becomes a predetermined combination of specific display modes (specific display result) is usually called "big hit". When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game medium shifts to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) in which it is easy to win a prize. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. An opening time (for example, 30 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses.

Further, there is one that can display a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to the variable display which has not been executed yet, an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed). For example, some hold displays are always displayed in a rotating manner (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-212136, A (figure 67).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the effect cannot be enhanced because the specific display only operates.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of production.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and includes a rendering device (for example, rendering accessory 90201) capable of performing rendering and an operable movable body (for example, A push button 90120) and a specific effect executing means (for example, a control microcomputer 90100 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5)) near the movable body using the effect device. In step S908120), a movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion in step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100), and a mode involving operation (for example, an advanced position or a retracted position). A specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, corresponding to a change in execution) in a mode in which the display position is switched to, a mode in which the expressionless mode is switched to a mode in which sweat is spread with eyes open and a mode in which tears are flown Active display, hold display corresponding to fluctuations that have not started yet, and display mode of specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). Display shape, pattern, position, range, etc. May be changed to a specific display means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S663B and S667B are performed to display an active display, and steps S3911 and S3929 are performed to suspend display. (A portion for displaying and changing the display mode of the specific display by performing step S4713) and a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display (for example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) By executing the suggested effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the change effect is set in step S4506, the process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S8004, and steps S8006 and S8105 are performed. a portion) to perform change effect, comprising a movable body control means is operable to movable member when a specific effect is executed (e.g., FIG. 90 (3) of the oscillating operation of the push button 90120 shown in After that, the specific display shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed), and the specific display means performs an operation mode of the specific display when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, display position (advance position, retreat position). Operation frequency ( Other operation modes such as high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward) may be used.) Shows Ri changeable der the display mode (for example, effect control microcomputer 100 executes the steps S4707～S4709, specific display of the display position is executed the first change effect is in the advanced position In this case, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the display mode of the specific display is not changed when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position ( The display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%)) , change determining means for determining whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the specific display, and operation mode selecting means for selecting the operation mode of the specific display. The specific display means displays the specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selecting means, and the operation mode selecting means selects the first operation mode and the first operation mode as the operation mode of the specific display. It is possible to select one of the second operation modes in which the display position is frequently changed, the change determining means determines that the display mode is changed, and the unchanged specific display in which the display mode has not been changed is displayed. When it is, the second operation mode is selected at a higher rate than when the unchanged specific display is not displayed . With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode in which an operation is performed regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (for example, the display position (extend position, The evacuation position is displayed in a mode in which the evacuation position is switched), and the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIG. By executing step S4508 by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 5, change effect (first change effect, second change effect) is generated when the operation frequency is high compared to when the operation frequency is low. (Easy to execute). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the specific display means can display the specific display by switching between the specific operation mode (for example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (for example, the retracted position) (for example, The effect control microcomputer 100 can execute steps S4704, S4709, and S4710), and changes the display mode of the specific display when the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestive effect is executed is the specific operation mode. It is possible (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4713 to display the specific display when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. The aspect can be changed). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the suggestive effect executing means includes a plurality of types including a first suggestive effect (for example, a first change effect) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a second change effect). One of the suggested effects can be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes any of the changed effects by performing steps S8004, S8006, and S8105), and the specific display means is The specific display can be displayed by switching between the specific operation mode (for example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (for example, the retracted position) (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4704, S4709, and S4710). When the first suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 can change the display mode of the specific display). By executing steps S4707 to S4713, the display mode of the specific display can be changed when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position). When executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4711 to S4713 to execute the second change effect). It is also possible to change the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether the display position of the target specific display is the advance position or the retreat position). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

(Means 5) It is possible to suggest that any one of the means 1 to 4 controls the advantageous state according to the display mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, in steps S3906 and S3924, By determining the display mode pattern using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in 39, the reliability of the big hit (white <blue <red) is suggested by the display mode, and the display of the specific display by the operation mode of the specific display It is possible to suggest whether or not the mode changes (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the operation frequency by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46C in step S4508, The reliability (low frequency<high frequency) for changing the display mode of the specific display depending on the operation frequency may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the suggestion effect executing means has the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, the first hold shown in FIGS. 52(1) and 52(2)). A suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 52(1) and 52) and a changed specific display in a state where the changed specific display is displayed. Is a suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 52(1) and (4) in FIG. 52(1) and (4)) suggesting a change in the display mode of another specific display (for example, the second hold display 53 shown in FIGS. , (5) in the second change effect) can be executed in a manner in which at least a part is common (for example, a manner in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 52(1)). Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the contents of the effect surprising and improve the effect of the effect.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the specific display means displays a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display at least in a normal mode (for example, “white”), A first specific mode (for example, "red") having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, performance suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode,) Pseudo suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)) (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, "white" or "red" or the second special suggestion mode is reserved. The display can be displayed), and the effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 53(5) and 53(2), the second special suggestion). The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then the specific content of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode. The display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started, The hold display 53 displayed in the special suggestion mode can be changed to “red”). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the specific aspect.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to the following means A1 to means A6. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, the display area of the effect display device is display-controlled in a non-display state (dark state) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-259540, and then the effect display device is darkened. A gaming machine is known in which a special light emission effect (specific effect) in which a predetermined light vortex image is displayed and controlled in a display area is executed. However, in such a gaming machine, the effect of the specific effect may not be sufficiently enhanced when the specific effect is executed. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of the specific effect.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a rendering device (eg, performance accessory 90201) capable of performing rendering, and an operable movable body (eg, push). Button 90120) and a specific effect executing means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the specific effect in the form shown in FIG. 90(5)) near the movable body using the effect device. The portion for executing step S908120) and the movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, the portion for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) are provided, and the movable body control means executes the specific effect. The movable body can be operated when moving (for example, the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3)). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the specific effect.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect after the movable body is operated by the movable body control means (for example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3)). Later, the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the specific effect before the start of the specific effect.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the movable body is an operation means (for example, a push button 90120) operable by the player, and the movable body control means operates the operation means when the specific effect is executed. The vibrating operation is performed (for example, after the vibrating operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed), and the operating means is a decorative member (for example, a visual member that can visually recognize the vibrating operation. , And the vibrated member 90303) shown in FIGS. 55 and 56. With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to a specific effect by sight and touch.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the effect light emitter (for example, the frame LED 9028) and the display means when the specific effect is executed are displayed in the dark (for example, FIG. 90(2)). ), a dark display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909) a dark display execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes step S908108), and The movable body control means includes a light emission control means for performing light emission control of the light emitting body (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes steps S908109 and S8123), and the light emission control means turns off the light emission body for effect. In this state, the movable body can be operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 90(3), the effect display device 909 is displayed in the dark (blackout display) and all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off). , The push button 90120 is vibrated). With such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively guide the player's line of sight to the specific effect.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the movable body control means has at least a first operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 1 second) and a second operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 3 seconds). The movable body can be operated by a plurality of types of operation modes including (for example, as shown in FIG. 86, 1 second, 3 seconds, and 5 seconds are provided as the vibration time of the push button 90120). The specific effect executing means has different execution modes of the specific effect when the movable body is operated in the first operation mode and when the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 86). The specific effect A is executed when the push button 90120 having a vibration time of 1 second is vibrated, and the specific effect B is executed when the push button 90120 having a vibration time of 3 seconds is vibrated. May be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the operation mode of the movable body can be focused on.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1 to A5, a display means having a display area (for example, the effect display device 909) and a predetermined area in the display area that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, an upper area) 905B or the like) predetermined display control means capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, a mini image) (for example, in the second other embodiment, advance notice in step S908003 of the effect symbol variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 90100). By selecting a process table according to the effect, and executing the process of step S908005 of the effect symbol variation start process or the effect during effect symbol variation process (step S90802) according to the process table according to the notice effect, the notice effect is executed. Part) and a visual line guidance effect (for example, a mini image moving in the area Z901) that guides the player's visual line to a predetermined area in the display area (for example, a second alternative embodiment). In the form, in the step S908003 of the effect symbol variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the process table corresponding to the notice effect is selected, and the process of step S908005 of the effect symbol variation start process is performed in accordance with the process table according to the notice effect. It may be configured to include a part for executing the notice effect by executing the effect symbol changing process (step S90802). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is the block diagram which shows the circuit constitution example of the production control baseplate, the lamp driver baseplate and the audio output baseplate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board performs. It is a flow chart which shows 4ms timer interruption processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production design which is prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a big hit type judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviations. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol variation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing which CPU for production control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation display control processing. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the stop design of production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flow chart which shows operation frequency determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a change effect execution lottery table, an execution target determination lottery table, and an operation frequency determination lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows the production design fluctuation process in production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view showing a display position switching lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus at the time of performing a 2nd change effect in the modification 1. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in a case where a hold display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode in the modified example 2. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is an exploded perspective view for explaining the internal structure of a push button. It is an exploded perspective view for explaining the internal structure of a push button. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is the block diagram which shows the circuit constitution example of the production control baseplate, the lamp driver baseplate and the audio output baseplate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board performs. It is a flow chart which shows 4ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a big hit type judgment table. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol variation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing which CPU for production control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the stop design of production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the specific production decision table. It is the flowchart which shows the production design fluctuation process. It is the flowchart which shows the production design fluctuation process. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect of suggestive production and specific production. It is the figure which looked at the effect display device and the accessory (indicated by the dotted line) in the second other embodiment from the front. FIG. 92 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 91 in the second other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the movement of the mini-images A to C in the second other embodiment. It is an example of a production screen of a notice production that gives advance notice of the degree of expectation of execution of super reach in the second other embodiment. It is an example of an effect screen of an announcement effect for announcing the jackpot expectation degree in the second other embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 2 which is openably and closably provided in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). (Excluding the board 6).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the hitting ball feed tray 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

Near the center of the game area 7, a performance display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area that variably displays the effect symbols for three decorations (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display areas include “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol may be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display device 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display device 8b, since the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress status of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 9, the symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) are continued for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbols (for example, the left, middle, and right symbols are arranged in the same symbol) In the state of matching with the combination of symbols), the state of being stopped, swinging, scaling or deforming, or a plurality of symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are exchanged. Then, the production performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not the big hit symbol, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is displayed in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later, and the second. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variable display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.), when performing the effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect contents including the variable display of the effect pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are diversified production modes, such as productions and productions in which a movable object shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in the variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing a variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, by confirming the state of the fourth symbol, is it currently in the variable display state? Whether or not it can be surely recognized. The fourth symbol is always variably displayed in a constant motion, and is not visible on the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c and the second special symbol for the first special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off in a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that “variable display is synchronized” means that the variable display start time and the variable display time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, a display color (a display color different from the deviant. For example, deviant) is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, whereas it is displayed in red when it is a big hit.By the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probability big hit). When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b, the display color reminding the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the outfall) For example, when it is out of focus, it is displayed in blue, whereas when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. In addition, the display color is changed according to the type of the big hit (normal big hit or probability variation big hit). The display color when the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off is the same as the background image when turned off so as to prevent the background image from disappearing. It is desirable that the display color be different from the image (for example, black).

In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. However, apart from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. You may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately turned on, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be possible to indicate whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown to correspond to the respective fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area common to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using a light-emitting body, such as a lamp and LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which display and display of different display colors are repeated at regular time intervals. Also, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, Alternatively, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such that lighting and extinction are repeated at different time intervals. Further, for example, when the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is derived and displayed, and when the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, it is the same big hit symbol. Alternatively, the stop symbols in different modes may be stopped and displayed.

On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display device (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display device 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the lower part of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display device 8b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in, for example, a rectangular shape. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). I have something to do.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 8a and 8b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing 14 (including winning), start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening and a gate, and the concept includes that the gaming ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, there is provided a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 in which game balls can be won. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14 (it is easy to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game balls are more likely to be won in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier to win the game ball in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. It should be noted that, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be difficult to win the prize, but it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win).

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the gap between the lower end of the effect displaying device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further narrowed, or the first start winning opening 13 is provided. The nails are densely arranged around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. Alternatively, the winning rate of the first starting winning port 13 may be set higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 14 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second winning opening 13 are provided. A variable winning ball device that opens and closes any of the starting winning openings 14 may be provided.

On the side of the first special symbol display device 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (reserved memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a which consists of 4 indicators is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a increases the number of the indicator which lights up each time there is an effective starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

On the side of the second special symbol display device 8b, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 18b composed of four display devices for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol reservation storage display 18b increases the number of display devices to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a hold storage display section 18c for displaying either one of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. For example, the pending storage display unit 18c displays the first pending storage number in the low base state, while displaying the second pending storage number in the high base state. The first number of reserved storages and the second number of reserved storages may be individually displayed. Further, it may be configured to provide a total reserved storage display unit that displays the total reserved storage number, which is the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed side by side in the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 in the combined holding storage display section. , So that it is recognizable whether it is the first hold memory or the second hold memory (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in red and the second hold memory is displayed in blue). You may comprise.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pending display for the pending storage, which has not been changed yet, is displayed in the pending storage display unit 18c, and the pending storage is performed from the start to the end of the variable display for the pending storage. The hold display for storage is continuously displayed on the active display portion 18d different from the hold storage display portion 18c. That is, on the active display portion 18d, the active display (variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed.

Hereinafter, the pending storage display unit 18c, the active display unit 18d, and the range surrounding the pending storage display unit 18c and the active display unit 18d may be collectively referred to as an “interface image”. This interface image is displayed regardless of whether there is a hold display or an active display, but it is erased in a specific situation (for example, during a big hit game state or during execution of a specific effect such as super reach). It is something. In addition, hereinafter, the hold display and the active display may be collectively referred to as “specific display”.

Specifically, the mole character is displayed as a pending display and an active display on the pending storage display section 18c and the active display section 18d. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 1, one active display and three hold displays are displayed.

In addition, "white", "blue", and "red" are provided as the display modes of the specific display, and the reliability with respect to being a big hit in the corresponding variation is different. For example, the reliability of the big hit is red>blue>white.

The display mode of the specific display can be changed by performing a predetermined change effect. As the change effect, the first change effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display and the second change effect in which the arrow flies toward the target specific display are provided. The display mode of the specific display that is hit or the specific display that the arrow hits is changed.

Further, as a display position of the specific display, an advance position that appears to be jumping out of the ground (for example, the first display position of the hold display in FIG. 1) and an evacuation position that appears to be submerged in the ground (for example, the figure The display position of the first active display and the second and third hold displays) is provided. The display position of each specific display is controlled so as to switch randomly. For example, the display position switching frequency (operation frequency) is determined for each variation, and the display position is switched based on the determined operation frequency.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b, a performance symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 9 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 for controlling the variable display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command capable of specifying the variation time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives it. The variable display of the effect design is controlled according to the variable time specified by the changed pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in principle in synchronization. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. There may be a gap between them. Therefore, if an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol may not be completely synchronized.

A movable member 78, which is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates, is provided on the left side of the decoration portion around the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when the notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 78 may be operated, for example, not only in the movable object advance notice effect but also in the pseudo-relation effect or the super reach effect.

In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates in the lower left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. The effect blade role objects 79a and 79b operate, for example, when a notice effect (effect blade effect notice effect) is executed. Note that the effect blade role objects 79a and 79b may be operated not only in the effect blade effect product notice effect, but also in the pseudo-relation effect or the super reach effect, for example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 8b. When the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in an open state in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the special winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

The gaming area 6 is also provided with winning holes (ordinary winning holes) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of prize gaming balls determined in advance based on winning of the gaming balls. The game balls that have won the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

On the right side of the game board 6, a normal symbol display device 10 is provided. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called normal symbols (for example, "○" and "x").

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the pattern becomes visible when turned on) are alternately turned on to perform variable display. For example, when the lower lamp is turned on at the end of variable display, it is a win. .. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state where the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 10, a normal symbol reservation storage display device 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1. Furthermore, compared with the normal state, the probability of being decided to be a big hit is a high probability change state (compared to the normal state, a state in which the probability of being a big hit as a variable display result of a special symbol is increased. In the high-probability state.), the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 will be a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

Around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the bottom there is an outlet 26 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, two speakers 27 for producing a sound effect or a voice as a predetermined voice output are provided on the upper left and right sides outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with not only a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, effect selection) by rotating the dial.

The game machine drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into a game area 7 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hit ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then comes down the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, That 1 start condition is established), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning port 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation big hit, it is shifted to a so-called probability variation state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easy to start winning (that is, a special symbol). The execution condition of the variable display on the display devices 8a, 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established), and the game state is controlled to a high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being in the open state is increased, or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended, as compared with the case of not being in the high base state. It will be easier to win the starting prize.

It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 15 does not extend the time for which it is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), but shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 will be a winning symbol is increased. Therefore, the high base state may be set. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being in the open state is increased. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which it is easy to start winning. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probability variation symbol, and the like, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state in which it is easy to start winning). In addition, increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, by shifting to a normal symbol time saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened, the high base state may be shifted. In the normal symbol time saving state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of the variation of the normal symbol is increased, and as a result, the frequency of winning the normal symbol is increased. Therefore, as the frequency of winning the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 increases to the open state, and the starting winning easily occurs (high base state).

Further, in this embodiment, when shifting to the high base state, it is also shifted to a time saving state (special symbol saving time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to such a time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol or the effect symbol is increased (in other words, the storage of the reserved memory is exhausted). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which an invalid start winning occurs. Therefore, an effective starting winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (transfer to high base state) May be. Also, by shifting to any one of the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (high base State). Further, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it is easy to start winning (high. It is also possible to set).

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. In the one-chip microcomputer, at least the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56 may be incorporated, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or incorporated. The I/O port section 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created in the power supply board 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by power supply.

Since the CPU 56 in the game control microcomputer 560 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, the following description means that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 53 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, the numerical data read has a random number generating function.

The random number circuit 53 has a selection setting function of an update range of numerical data (a selection setting function of an initial value and a selection setting function of an upper limit value), a selection setting function of a numerical data update rule, and a selection of a numerical data update rule. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the operation is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

In addition, an input driver circuit 58 for giving the detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the starting opening switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game controlling microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. There is. Further, the output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also a main board. It is mounted on 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b, which variably displays the special symbol, the normal symbol display device 10, which variably displays the normal symbol, the first special symbol reservation storage The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The production control command is received, and display control of the production display device 9 that variably displays production symbols is performed.

In addition, the production control means mounted on the production control board 80 performs display control of the decorative LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the audio output board 70.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the sound output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

The production control board 80 is equipped with a production control CPU 101 and a production control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information on production such as production symbol process flags. The RAM may be external. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures and symbols (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for this. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM according to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

As a signal direction restricting means, the signal input from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Further, the unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the production control command and the production control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I/O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

In addition, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 via the output port 106 to operate the movable member 78. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 87 for operating the effect blade accessory 79a, 79b via the output port 106.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED/lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED/lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitting body provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. In addition, the electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates a voice or sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesizing IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706 and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the tone number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in time series.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. Is set (step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode showing an interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S6). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether the backup RAM area data protection process (eg, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. Yes (step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply was stopped (steps S41 to S43). Processing). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set to the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processes of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden variation big hit, small hit, or off) to the effect control board 80 (step. S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13) when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may do so. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may restart the variable display of the fourth symbol on the basis of receiving the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the variable time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the variable time timer that has been saved is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been used has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process process is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the special symbol process flag that is saved.

It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result designation command when the power is restored. .. If the value of the variable time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the display state designation command is not transmitted and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

Further, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that there is a power outage during fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates during a power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command has not been received, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

In this embodiment, it is checked whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set to the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Initially set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) for initialization (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 53 (step S14). The CPU 56 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 53 to update the value of the random R, for example, by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S17) and the initial value random number updating process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. It is set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is not made, and a random number for determining whether or not the reach is made when the big hit is not made. The for-use random number updating process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls, by itself, a game display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine. In the process to do, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol per determination random number is one round (normal symbol per determination random number If the number of steps between the minimum and maximum possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to that counter.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed by using effect symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 9. Also, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the reach is not suddenly reached and the sudden probability big hit symbol (for example, "135")). May be displayed as a stop). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the reach effect is executed by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach effect control.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is executed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power-supply-stop-time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21 ).

Next, the CPU 56 is the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b, the normal symbol display device 10, the first special symbol reserved memory display device 18a, the second special symbol reserved memory display device 18b, the normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, a drive signal is output to each display device in accordance with the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol per determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are executed in accordance with the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process process of step S27, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variable display result is derived and displayed, or the variable display result of the normal symbol is displayed. When is hit, a process of controlling the variable winning ball device 15 to an open state or a closed state is executed.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 100 (production control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, in accordance with the winning detection based on that any of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 is turned on, a payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON/OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output process).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for performing a special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for the normal symbol display control data setting ( Step S33). CPU56, for example, until the end flag is set when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol, the variation speed of the normal symbol switches the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 10.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be executed in.

When the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the effect display device 9 display the shift symbol in a stopped state, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally off") in the case where the variable display result is a deviating symbol.

When the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the effect display device 9 display the deviation symbol in a stopped state, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, the reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not become the big hit symbol finally may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such effect symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "off".

In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed together (however, in the case of sudden probability big hit). In some cases, the sudden change jackpot symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

When "5", which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b, in the effect display device 9, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "a sudden sudden change big hit". After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability big hit symbol. For example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the small hit symbol "5" being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as the "small hit" variable display mode. ..

Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to the number of times of opening the special winning opening is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability changing state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probability changing state. The sudden probability big hit is allowed up to a small number of times the big winning opening is opened in the big hit game state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely large. It is a short big hit, and it is a big hit that shifts the game state after the big hit game to the probability changing state (that is, by doing so, it looks to the player as if it suddenly changed to the probability changing state). Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden winning big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the special winning opening. By controlling in such a manner, if the special winning opening is opened for 0.1 seconds twice, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player. (Probably changed state) can be expected, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

When the gaming machine is configured such that all types of big hits are probability-change big hits, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. Also, when the big hit types are all probability varying big hits, if a small hit is provided, a sudden probability big hit without transitioning to a probability changing state (high probability state) and a time saving state (high base state) Is preferably provided.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbols prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 6, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 used in the case of not reaching is accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, and the variation is performed once again. Of the variation patterns used when reaching, which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo rendition, when the normal PB2-1 is used, the variation is performed once again. Also, in the case of using the normal PB2-2 among the change patterns used for reach and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, re-change is performed twice. Further, among the variation patterns used for reach and involving pseudo-representation, when the super PA3-1 to the super PA3-2 are used, the revariation is performed three times. It should be noted that the re-variation is to temporarily perform the production symbols that are once out from the start of the variable display of the production symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, and then execute the variable display of the production symbols again. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 -3 to normal PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 Is prepared. Note that, in FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3 and the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the variation patterns that are used when the sudden variation big hit or the small hit is not accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed once. In addition, when the normal PB2-4 is used among the variation patterns used for reach and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, in the case of using the super PA3-3 to the super PA3-4 among the change patterns used when reaching, and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-change is performed three times. Further, the variation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of the sudden change big hit or the small hit and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-repeating is once again changed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly set according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo-linkage, the variation time is 32). The fixed time is fixed at 0.75 seconds, and the variable time is fixed at 22.75 seconds in the case of super reach A without pseudo-linking.) However, even in the case of the same type of super reach, The varying time may be different according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the number of total pending storages increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be different depending on the first number of reserved memories. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be different according to the second number of reserved memories. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage numbers 0 to 2 and the pending storage numbers 3, 4). A variation pattern type determination table for use in advance) may be prepared), and the determination time may be selected according to the value of the first number of pending storages or the number of second pending storages to vary the varying time.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later) (for big hit type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of variation pattern (for determination of variation pattern type)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value)

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by first using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determining the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process.

The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the type of reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into fluctuation pattern types. In addition, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-repeating, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that does not involve pseudo-reaction, a variation pattern type that includes one variation pattern, and It may be divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of two fluctuations and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of three fluctuations again. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence/absence of effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effects.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit, the normal CA 3-1 which is the change pattern type including the change pattern involving only the normal reach, and the change involving the normal reach and the pseudo-link. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 which is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern involving reach. ing. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Further, in the case of being out of alignment, a non-reach CA2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-relation, or slip production, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but that includes pseudo-relation or slip production. Includes a non-reach CA2-2 that is a variation pattern type that includes, a non-reach CA2-3 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve a reach, a pseudo-link, or a sliding effect, and a variation pattern that includes only a normal reach. A variation pattern type including normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type, a variation pattern type which includes a variation pattern involving a normal reach and a re-variation twice pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern which includes a normal reach and a re-variation one pseudo sequence. Is classified into a normal CA 2-6 which is a fluctuation pattern type including the above, and a super CA 2-7 which is a fluctuation pattern type involving super reach.

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the random number for jackpot type determination of (1) and the random number for normal symbol determination of (4). Count up (add 1). That is, those are the judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or the initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the game effect. In addition, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (which may be hardware outside the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the big hit determination random number. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of a hardware random number.

FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit judgment table includes a normal big hit judgment table used in a normal state (a game state that is not the probability changed state) and a probability change time big hit determination table used in the probability changed state. In the normal time jackpot determination table, the numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 8(A) are set, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 8(A). Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8(A) is a jackpot determination value.

FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol There is (for the second special symbol). In the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), each numerical value described in FIG. 8(B) is set, and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), FIG. 8(C). Each listed numerical value is set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are the small hit determination values.

The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the game state is shifted to the probability change state. Even if the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, a small hit occurs, and if it is configured so as to produce an effect that fuels whether or not the probability changes, the current gaming state is the probability changing state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoyed. Therefore, if the small hit does not occur during the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit is less likely to occur when the gaming state is the positive changed state, and the stunning effect against the positive change is not performed more than necessary. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels troublesome.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 53 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit judging random number (random R). The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. 8(A). If any of the jackpot determination values are matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, or a sudden probability variation jackpot) for a special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8(B) and 8(C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it means to determine whether to shift to the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 13 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning is given to the second starting winning opening 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the percentage of the “small hit” is determined.

8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Of these, FIG. 8(D) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a in the case. Further, FIG. 8(E) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", based on a random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the "probability variation jackpot" and "the sudden variation jackpot." In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8(D) and 8(E), eight judgment values are assigned to the “sudden probability big hit” in the big hit type judgment table 131a (40 minutes). 8 is determined to be a sudden probability variation big hit), whereas the jackpot type determination table 131b is assigned two determination values for "a sudden probability variation big hit" (ratio of 2/40). Suddenly decided as a sudden change jackpot in)) Explain the case. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 13 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning is given to the second starting winning opening 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as "a sudden probability big hit" is high. In addition, "sudden probability big hit" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden probability big hit" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (that is, , The "special sudden change big hit" may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8(D) and (E), a sudden certainty big hit (two-round big hit) as the first specific game state that gives a predetermined amount of game value, and the game. There is a case where it is determined to be a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot (15 rounds jackpot) as the second specific gaming state that gives a game value of an amount larger than the value, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Although the case where it is decided to set the first specific game state at a high rate is shown, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of the game balls to the large winning hole per round is increased as the game value is determined. Good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the special winning opening per one big hit during the big hit is extended may be determined. Further, for example, even in the case of the same 15-round big hit, the first specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened once per round, and the second specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened plural times per round It is possible to prepare and increase the game value of the second specific game state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times in either the first specific game state or the second specific game state (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific game state) May be finished, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round will remain), and an effect may be executed in a manner that fuels whether or not the big hit continues. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, since all 15 rounds have been internally ended, the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round remains internally. Therefore, the jackpot game may be continued (an effect in which the jackpot opening is additionally started by a bonus after finishing the jackpot of 15 times opening).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probably odd big hit” and “suddenly sudden big hit”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It's not limited to For example, a 7R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, there are three types of big hit types: "normal big hit", "probably odd big hit" and "suddenly sudden big hit". A jackpot type may be provided. In addition, conversely, there may be less than three types of big hits, for example, only two types of big hits may be provided.

The "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and is shifted to a time saving state (high base state) after the end of the big hit game state (see steps S167 and 168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is completed 100 times, the time saving state ends (see steps S168 and S137 to 140 described later). In addition, in this embodiment, even after a big hit occurs after the shift to the time saving state and before the end of execution of the variable display 100 times, the time saving state ends (see step S132 described later).

The "probable variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) after the jackpot gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the probability variation state). The time saving state (high base state) is also entered (see steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, after shifting to the probability changing state, the probability changing state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

Further, the "sudden probability big hit" is allowed up to the number of times that the special winning opening is opened less than "normal big hit" or "probable big hit" (in this embodiment, the opening is 0.1 second twice). It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden sudden change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal big hit" and "probable odds big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in "sudden positive big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it is hardly expected that a game ball will win the big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability big hit game state is suddenly changed to the probability variation state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is changed to the time saving state (high base state)). (See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, after shifting to the probability changing state, the probability changing state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the "small hit" occurs, the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit game state is caused by the "sudden probability big hit". Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change after the opening of the special winning opening twice, and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden variation big hit" or a "small hit", and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, the determination values (the jackpot type determination values, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 1 and correspond to each of the "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot", respectively. ) Is set. When the value of Random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

9(A) to 9(C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the variation pattern type is a random number for variation pattern type determination according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referenced to determine any one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

In each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, numerical values (determination values) that are compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination, that is, normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, The determination value corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9(A) used when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, and FIG. 9B used when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot”. The assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B.

In this way, when comparing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. Further, a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type that differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the result of the determination as to which of the plurality of types of big hit types, and the ratios determined for the same fluctuation pattern type can be different.

As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probability variation big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination It can be understood that the variable display involving at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed when is 150 to 251.

In addition, regarding the super reach jackpot, the variation pattern type (variation pattern type including the variation patterns of the super PA3-3 and super PA3-4) with pseudo-relation and the variation pattern type without super-relation (super PB3-3, super). PB3-4 fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern). In this case, in both of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for the normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for the probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type accompanied by the super reach and the pseudo-relation and the super reach and the pseudo rendition are set. The variation pattern type that is not involved is assigned.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is the "abrupt probability sudden jackpot", for example, when the jackpot types such as the special CA4-1 and the special CA4-2 are other than the "sudden sudden change jackpot". Is assigned a determination value for a variation pattern type to which a determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability big hit", the sudden big hit control is different from the normal big hit or the positive big hit control. It can be determined by the variation pattern type.

Further, FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing the small hitting variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D includes a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern. Is a table that is referenced to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(D), when it is decided to make a small hit, the special CA4-1 is decided as the variation pattern type. ..

10(A) to 10(C) are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for deviation. Of these, FIG. 10(A) shows the out-of-range variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. In addition, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for outliers used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for deviation include a plurality of fluctuation pattern types based on random numbers (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a deficit pattern. Is a table that is referenced to determine any of the above.

Note that the example shown in FIG. 10 shows a case where different out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135C are used depending on whether the game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. However, it may be configured to use the common out-of-range variation pattern type determination table in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state and the case of the total pending storage number being 3 or more. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common variation pattern type determination table 135C for probability variation/time saving is used regardless of the total number of pending storages, but it is possible to use probability variation/time reduction for variation. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of out-of-range variation pattern determination tables (tables with different determination values) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the stagger variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3, and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Although the case where two types of tables, that is, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B, are used, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, the total pending storage number 1, and the total pending storage number 2). , The deviation variation pattern type determination tables for the total sum storage storage number 3 and the total sum storage storage number 4 may be separately used). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total pending storage number may be used. For example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage numbers 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total pending storage number, but the deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to use a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved storage number (that is, the first reserved storage number). A deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, first reserved memory number 1, first reserved memory number 2, first reserved memory number 3, first reserved memory number 4... You may use each separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, the deviation change pattern type determination table for the first number 0 to 2 of reserved memories, the first number 3 of reserved memories, the first number 4 of reserved memories,... May be used. Even in this case, if the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages is large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. .. Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving super-reach as a specific variable display pattern.

The "particular effect mode" is a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as a variation pattern accompanied by super reach, is set and the player can have an expectation for a big hit. Is. Further, the "expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit" indicates an appearance rate (probability) at which the big hit appears when a variable display (for example, a variable display accompanied by super reach) is executed in the particular presentation mode. ing. For example, when the variable display with super reach is executed, the jackpot expectation is (proportion of executing the super reach when the jackpot is decided)/(when the jackpot is decided and lost) The rate at which superreach is performed in both cases) is calculated by calculating.

Each of the out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type, and the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, the judgment value corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

As shown in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B), in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type It can be seen that, when the number is 230 to 251, the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type If 1 to 79, regardless of the total pending storage number, it is understood that the variable display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect). With such a table configuration, in the present embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B) has at least the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, total reserved memory number) stored in the reserved storage means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer), A common determination value (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) is assigned. Note that the "variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern" means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by reach, and is not accompanied by effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effect. It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when a big hit does not occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, a common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state. However, is the current gaming state a probability variation state? The big hit variation pattern type determination tables, which are separately prepared, may be used according to the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B is selected to determine the variation pattern of the shortening variation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total pending storage number (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number may be used when the variation pattern of the shortened variation can be selected according to the current game state. ), the threshold value may be different. For example, in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, when the total pending storage number is 3 (or, for example, when the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number is 2) The variation pattern type for deviation is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined, and when the gaming state is the probable variation state or the time saving state, the total number of pending storages is 1 or 2 In the case of (or, for example, even when the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages is 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type for shortening deviation is selected and the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation is determined. It may be determined in some cases.

11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, change pattern determination according to the determination result of the big hit type or the change pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of the normal CA3-1 to the normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the usage table in accordance with the result of the decision to select either CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A-137B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect design is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern involving only normal reach and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern including normal reach and pseudo-link. A case is shown where the normal CA 3-2 is classified into a certain normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern involving super-reach (sometimes accompanied by pseudo-relation together with super-reach). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern types, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with reach. It is shown that the data is classified into two types. Note that, in FIG. 11B, the variation pattern types may not be divided according to the presence or absence of reach, but may be divided according to the presence or absence of effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effects. In this case, for example, the special CA4-1 includes a special PG1-1 and a special PG2-1 that are variation patterns that do not accompany pseudo-relationships and slip effects, and the special CA4-2 accompanies pseudo-reconnections and slip effects. The special PG1-2, the special PG1-3, and the special PG2-2 may be included.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out”, the outlier variation pattern determination table 138A is based on the random number for the variation pattern determination (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to for determining the fluctuation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the usable fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX(H), it controls the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H), the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command 8F00 (H) is a production control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol fixing designation command, the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise, initializes it. Send a command.

The command 9F00(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 to A003 (H) are display control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, or a small hit/sudden-variable big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of "normal big hit", the big hit start 1 designation command (A001(H)) is used, and in the case of "normal big hit", big hit start 2 designation command (A002(H)) is used. In the case of “sudden sudden change big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to send a fanfare designating command for sudden probability big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designating command in the case of a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX(H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) indicating a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Note that the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, and therefore a different special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Transmits a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, a different special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when finishing the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201(H)) after opening the special winning opening designating round 1 is transmitted, and when finishing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening designation command (A30A(H)) designating round 10.

Command A301 (H) is a production control command (big hit end 1 designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by "normal big hit" is ended. Command A302 (H) is a production control command (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302(H)) is used when the jackpot game by "probably strange jackpot" is finished. The command A303 (H) is a production control command (small hit/sudden odd change jackpot end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability big hit game end. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden variation jackpot end designation in the case of a sudden variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background designating command) for designating the background display when the game state is the time saving state. Command B002 (H) is a production control command (probability variation state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the probability variation state.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designating command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number addition specification command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has increased by 1. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by 1. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has decreased by 1.

In this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation) indicating that the reserved memory number has increased or decreased, respectively. Command, second reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the reserved storage in the following mode The information may be transmitted.

(1) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased in the one command is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is also specified. The (first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased in the one command is specified, and the total number of reserved memories is set as the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has the starting prize (which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (first start winning award designating command, second start winning award designating command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, a reserved storage number designating command for designating the number of reserved storages is transmitted. The total number of pending storages may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has the starting winning a prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (first start winning award designating command, second start winning award designating command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, a reserved storage number designating command for designating the number of reserved storages is transmitted. The increased storage number (first storage number or second storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

The command C4XX(H) and the command C6XX(H) are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and a type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the random number for variation pattern type determination out of the determination result at winning. (Variable category command).

In this embodiment, in a prize effect process (see FIG. 22) described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit, a small hit, and a big hit type at the time of a start winning. Then, it is determined which judgment value range the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value that designates a big hit or a small hit and a value that designates the type of the big hit are set, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and the type of the big hit. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the symbol designating command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted, depending on whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit.

For example, when it is determined that the game will be "disappeared" in the winning effect process described below, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 1 designating command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 2 designating command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 3 designating command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 4 designating command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "small hit" is determined, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 5 designating command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the display result designating command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be made common when setting the symbol designating command and when setting the display result designating command.

16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state, which display result the display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol becomes, and the random number for variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data according to whether or not it is determined that the range of the determination value falls within the range, and the variation category command is transmitted.

For example, when it is determined that the game state is in the normal state and out of the way at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 79 in step S232 of the effect processing at the time of winning described later. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least non-reach CA2-1 based on the receipt of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits the fluctuation category 2 command in which “01(H)” is set in the EXT data. Then, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which "05(H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least Super CA2-7 based on the receipt of the variation category 8 command.

The thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above fluctuation categories they belong to are specifically shown in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B). It is derived by picking up a value that can be the boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. This also applies to the subsequent variation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be the boundary of the determined determination value range.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the game state is a probable variation state, a time saving state, or a deviation at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number to 1 in step S232 of the winning effect process described later. .About.219 is determined. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 changes the EXT data with "08 (H)" set. Send a category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 220 to 251 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA 2-7 ). The variable category 10 command is transmitted.

It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern types of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the game state. Therefore, when executing the process of step S232 of the process of winning effect described later, if it is out of alignment, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the game state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the game state determination process of step S226 can be omitted.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the winning effect process described below. Determine whether. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of the normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which the EXT data is set to “10 (H)”. 21 Send a command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “11(H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 22 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 23 command is transmitted.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" will be obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the effect processing during winning. Determine whether. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it is the normal CA3-2 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 25 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 26 command is transmitted.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the sudden variation big jackpot will suddenly occur at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S232 of the effect processing at the time of winning described later. To judge. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “16 (H)”. 27 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of the special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the fluctuation category in which "17 (H)" is set in the EXT data. 28 command is transmitted.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will occur at the time of winning the start prize, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

It should be noted that the total number of pending storages is not always the same when the winning determination is performed at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started. There may be a case where the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variable display. However, in this embodiment, at least the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, and super CA3-3 are assigned common determination values regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect described below is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type is Super CA2-7 or Super CA3-3. Note that only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, and super CA3-3, the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of a winning determination result of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined that the other than the non-reach CA2-1, the super CA2-7, and the super CA3-3 at the time of winning, the variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified is transmitted. Good.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the winning prize for starting to the first starting winning opening 13 occurs in the time saving state (high base state), or the winning prize for starting to the first starting winning opening 13 during the big hit game, Except when it occurs (see steps S1215A and S1216A), the process of determination at the time of winning is executed every time the start winning occurs, and the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 15 is transmitted and the fluctuations shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. Category command is sent. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received symbol designating command and variation category command.

The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 installed on the main board 31. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice output board 70. To do.

For example, the game control microcomputer 560, there is a start winning, every time the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b, the variation pattern of the effect symbol is designated. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a production control command transmission method, production control command data is output from the main board 31 to the production control board 80 via the relay board 77 from the main board 31 one byte at a time using eight parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) acquisition signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing acquisition of effect control command data is used. 8-bit production control command data of the production control command is output in synchronization with the production control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of fetching 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command, the variable display (variation) and the second special of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. The image display that can be used in common with the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display device 8b, and the effect is produced along with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production parts such as the device 9, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the production control microcomputer 100.

18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, the process for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 56, if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 is on, that is, the start to the first starting winning opening 13 If a winning has occurred, a first starting opening switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, the CPU 56, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first starting winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

Special symbol normal processing (step S300): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of storages of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer (total storage count). The number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over.

Variation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the control for transmitting the variation pattern command according to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed, and the variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

Special symbol fluctuation process (step S303): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Special symbol stop process (step S304): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process of step S22.

Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control to send the special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The special winning opening opening preprocessing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the special winning opening opening preprocessing is also processing for starting a big hit game. In addition, the special winning opening opening specifying command is transmitted for each round with a value designating the round set in the EXT data, and thus a different special winning opening opening specifying command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Transmits a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10.

Special winning opening opening process (step S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the special winning opening, a process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, while performing control to transmit the designation command after opening during big hit to the production control microcomputer 100, when all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability variation flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. The small hit opening pre-processing is executed each time the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hitting open process (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. The processing etc. which confirms establishment of the closing conditions of the special winning opening are performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied, and the number of times of opening the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all opening is completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform the display control for informing the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20(A) is a flowchart showing the first starting port switch passage processing of step S312. Further, FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage processing of step S314.

First, the first starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the first starting opening switch passing process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of 1 reserved memories is 4 (step S1211A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and at the same time, the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 53 and the counter for generating the software random number, and storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern. A judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random numbers (random 3) are not stored in advance in the first starting opening switch passage process (at the time of winning a prize) and stored in the storage area, but are extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later.

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (reserved storage buffer) for storing random numbers or the like corresponding to the reserved storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation The pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case where a random number value such as a big hit determination random number is stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer as pending storage is shown. However, the predetermined information stored as pending storage is Not limited to random numbers. For example, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit is determined in advance based on a big hit determination random number, and the result of the decision may be stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer as pending storage. ..

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state) is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, in the big hit game state or the small hit game state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the winning display effect process is performed in which the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting prize is subsequently executed are pre-determined at the time of starting winning (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S1218A), and also transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 controls to send the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

In addition, by executing the processes of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates the symbol every time the start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 is performed and the winning effect process of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 and the winning effect production process of step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

However, when the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed by determining Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 controls in step S1220A to transmit only the first reserved storage number addition designation command. The winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variation category command) is not controlled. It should be noted that when the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed, a winning determination result specification is set by setting a value (for example, “FF(H)”) indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified as EXT data. You may make it transmit a command (designation command, variation category command).

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S1215A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize in the first starting winning opening 13, the step S1217A is executed only when the game state is the low base state. The winning production process is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the process of step S1216A is executed, so that when there is a start winning prize in the first starting winning opening 13, only in a big hit game state or a small hit game state, step S1217A. The winning effect production process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be moved to step S1217A only in the big hit game state, and if it is the small hit game state, the process may be shifted to step S1217A to execute the winning effect process.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is the state until the end of opening the special winning opening of the final round and the notification of the end of the big hit. Specifically, it is a state in which the processing from the special winning opening opening preprocessing (see step S305) to the big hit ending processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

Next, the second starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the second starting opening switch passage processing executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit value (specifically, the second holding). Whether the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4 or not) is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 53 and the counter for generating the software random number, and storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern. A judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for the variation pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the second starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted when the variation of the second special symbol is started. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S1218B), and also transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 controls to send the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

In addition, by executing the processes of steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates the symbol every time the start winning of the second starting winning port 14 is performed and the winning effect process of step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, a start winning is generated in the second start winning port 14, and when the winning effect process of step S1217B is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved storage number addition designating command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

It should be noted that also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as step S1215A may be performed, and the winning effect process of step S1217B may not be performed if it is a time saving state. That is, only in the normal state (low base state), the winning effect effect process of step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command.

Further, also in the second starting opening switch passage processing, the same processing as in step S1216A may be performed, and if the big hit game is being performed, the winning effect processing in step S1217B may not be executed. In addition, in the second starting opening switch passage process, the winning effect effect process of step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning judgment process may not be executed for the second special symbol). ..

22. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the prize winning effect process in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal big hit determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal process, which will be described later, determines the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts winning in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type and the variation pattern type random number is. By doing so, the variable display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning, as described later. To do.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets the certainty change flag indicating that the game state is the certainty change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the probability variation determination jackpot value shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not match (step S222). It is to be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the probability change state is confirmed in step S221 at the time of winning the start prize and the actual variable display based on the starting prize is started. There is. Therefore, the game state is changing during the period from when it is confirmed whether or not the state is the probable variation state in step S221 at the time of winning the start prize until when the variation display based on the starting prize is actually started (for example, variation start. If a sudden big hit or sudden sudden big hit occurs before, it may change from the normal state to the sudden change state.) Therefore, the game state determined in step S221 at the time of start winning and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a mismatch, the one that involves a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Good.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of probability variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hitting determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, the CPU 56, when there is a start winning into the first starting winning opening 13 (when executing the winning-time effect process of step S1217A), the small hit determination table (first It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning into the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect process of step S1217B), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00(H)” indicating that it is “out” in the symbol designating command. Is performed (step S224).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state and the time saving state in step S225 (specifically, whether the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set). To judge. It should be noted that, after confirming whether the state is the probability variation state and the time saving state at step S225 at the time of winning the start prize until the actual variable display based on the starting prize is started, a plurality of Variable display may be executed. Therefore, the game state changes during the period from the confirmation of whether the state is the probability variation state or the time saving state at the time of the start winning, until the variation display based on the start winning actually starts. (For example, when the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probability variation state.). Therefore, the game state determined in step S225 at the time of winning a start and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a mismatch, the one that involves a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Good.

Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for deviation according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination falls within the range of any determination value. Whether or not is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 described later, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Determines to set "08 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is not equal to or less than 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined to set “09 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16 ).

Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the game state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Determines to set "00(H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined to set "01(H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is less than or equal to 99 (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02(H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined to set “03(H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined to set “04 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16 ). If the threshold is less than or equal to 214 (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined to set “05 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, 215 to 229), it is determined to set “06 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). Further, when it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 229 (that is, when it is 230 to 251), it is determined to set “07 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

In the example of the threshold value determination shown above, since the threshold value is determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in the ascending order, the threshold value determined later is It does not fall below the threshold of the previous order. That is, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is less than or equal to the threshold value in the previous order, and 80 to 89. Will be determined. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. This also applies to the case of making a determination using another threshold value described below.

The threshold value in the normal state (low probability/low base state) may be always set without performing the game state determination in step S225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the judgment value is made common to at least the fluctuation pattern type which is "out of super reach", it is judged whether or not "out of super reach". be able to.

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sends the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating that the small hit is a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251 and determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (1 to 251) in step S232 described later. It is determined that "18(H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18(H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 classifies the big hit type based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning into the first starting winning opening 13 (when executing the winning-time effect processing of step S1217A), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first It is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot" or "sudden variation variation jackpot" using the special symbol) 131a. Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when performing the winning effect process of step S1217B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8(E) 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probably odd jackpot" or "sudden jackpot".

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data corresponding to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designating command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01(H)" indicating that the "normal big hit" is set in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02(H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is set in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03(H)" indicating that the "sudden probability big hit" is in the symbol designating command.

Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for the big hit in accordance with the big hit type determined in step S229 (step S231).

For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is made. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232 to be described later whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is equal to or less than the threshold value 74, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines to set "10 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 149 (that is, if it is 150 to 251), it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

In addition, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79 when it is determined that the “probable variation big hit” has occurred. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and when it is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Determines to set "13 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined to set "14 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not equal to or less than 79 (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

In addition, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 100 when it is determined that “a sudden probability big hit” has occurred. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232 to be described later whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 100 or less, and if the value is 100 or less (that is, 1 to 100). Determines to set "16 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not 100 or less (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined to set “17 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the variation pattern type determination random number. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

Note that in steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set, and in step S232, the set fluctuation pattern type is set. The determination table may be used to determine the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines from “00(H)” to “0B(H)” to “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H)" to "18(H)" is set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit in the winning determination, it is shown that the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is uniformly determined. When it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is reached, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, it may be possible to send a symbol designating command indicating that it has been determined at the time of winning when it becomes a big hit or a small hit, and to send a variation category command that comprehensively indicates that it is a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit. .. Then, for example, although the effect control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation which is comprehensively any one of the variation pattern types of the big hits. Based on the reception of the category command, a look-ahead notice effect, which will be described later, may be executed.

23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0 and the customer waiting demo designation command has not yet been transmitted, the CPU 56 confirms whether 30 seconds have passed since the last executed variable display was finished (step S51A). It should be noted that whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the last executed variable display was ended is determined, for example, by first setting a value corresponding to 30 seconds to a predetermined timer when Y is determined in step S51, It can be determined by checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and ends the processing. Note that, for example, when the CPU 56 transmits the customer waiting demo designation command in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after transmitting the customer wait demo designation command, the customer wait demonstration customer command is repeated based on that the customer wait demo designation command transmitted flag is set. It may be controlled not to send the demo designation command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in this embodiment, a case where the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted and the customer waiting demonstration display is started 30 seconds after the last executed variable display is finished is shown. However, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started after one minute has passed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step S54).

In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number (random R) is used in the winning effect production process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the big hit determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and may not be compared with the big hit determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, in step S220. Only the processing may be executed and the processing of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the time of the actual variation start. It is possible to prevent deviation.

Next, in the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, the CPU 56, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each reserved area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved storage buffer are shifted. To do.

That is, the CPU 56, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates "first", in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1. Further, the CPU 56 sums the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage areas corresponding to the total number of reserved storages=m (m=2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages=m-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective total reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the same as the order of the total reserved storage numbers=1-8.

Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

In addition, the CPU 56 controls to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the time saving state background designation command when only the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to send the normal state background designating command.

In addition, specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) according to the effect control command. Set it to a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted in order to the effect control microcomputer 100. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, first, a background designation command is transmitted, a variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, a display result designation command has been transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and further 4 ms has elapsed. The reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first special symbol indicating that the process is executed "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processes of steps S300 to S310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination which is extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Read the random number and judge the big hit. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a jackpot determination random number, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or a jackpot. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the probability of being the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is the non-determination variation state (normal state). More specifically, the probability variation big hit determination table in which a large number of big hit determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 are set) and the number of big hit determination values A normal big hit judgment table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) which is set to be smaller than the big hit judgment table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability variation big jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination table for normal time is used to perform the jackpot determination process. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8(A), the CPU 56 determines to make a big hit for the special symbol. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. It should be noted that determining whether or not to be a big hit is to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether or not to make a stop symbol in the special symbol display device a big hit symbol But also.

The confirmation as to whether or not the current game state is the probability variation state is performed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability variation state, and reset when ending the probability variation state. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability variation jackpot" or "a sudden variation jackpot" and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. After the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines to make a small hit for the special symbol. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8B. ) Is used to decide whether to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. .. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as the table used to determine the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8(E).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probable variation”) corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly sudden change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. The random number for use is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the probability of sudden probability jackpot being selected is high.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “sudden change big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is the deviating symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the big hit flag is set, depending on the big hit type decision result, one of the big hit symbols "1", "3", "7", "9" is decided as the stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "a sudden change jackpot", "1" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "normal jackpot" is determined, "3" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. However, when the "probability variation big hit" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the big hit type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown. However, the method of determining the big symbol type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is The invention is not limited to those shown in the embodiments. For example, prepare a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type in advance, and first determine the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, and the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. The type may also be determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A as a table to be used for determining the fluctuation pattern type as one of a plurality of kinds). )-(C)) (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D is used as a table used to determine one of the plurality of types of variation pattern types. )) is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

If the small hit flag is also not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S95). In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is completed, and the time saving flag is set, and the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is also entered into the probability changing state and the saving time state. Since it is also transferred to, the time saving flag is set. Therefore, when it is determined to be Y in step S95, in addition to the normal short-time control after the big hit game based on big hit, in addition to the probability variation state after the big hit game based on probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the time-shortened state with Sometimes it is done.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), that is, if the game state is the normal state, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type determination table 135A (for the variation pattern type used for determining the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types). (See FIG. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type for outliers is used as a table used to determine any one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As the table to be used, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S95 to S99, when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the deviation variation shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described below, and when the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the variation is performed in the process of step S102. The non-reach PA1-2 of the shortening variation is determined as the pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probable variation state or the time saving state, or when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be displayed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state or the time saving state (see FIG. 10C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation based on the number of pending storages (see FIG. 10(B)) is a different table, but a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

In this embodiment, even when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, when the total pending storage number is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1) The variable display of the shortened fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is almost 0. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

Next, the CPU 56 reads Random 2 (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) and selects it in the processing of step S92, S94, S97, S98, or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S100).

Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the variation patterns are hit patterns 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables to be used to determine the variation pattern from any of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. ), and one of the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 is read from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer), and the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101 is referred to, thereby changing the fluctuation pattern. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). If the random number 3 (fluctuation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 causes the variation pattern determination random number counter to generate the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to directly extract the value from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

In addition, when it is determined to be out of alignment, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). (Including the variation pattern types of the normal CA2-4 to the normal CA2-6 and the super CA2-7 shown in FIG. 2) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. Alternatively, the variation pattern type may be determined.

Further, also when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, the reach of the reach is determined according to the total number of reserved memories (may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number). The reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected to determine whether or not the reach is performed so that the reach probability becomes lower as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, the CPU 56, for example, in the determination as to whether or not "super reach out" or "non-reach out" in the winning effect process, matches the determination value assigned to the common range in the reach determination table. By determining whether or not to reach, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach is lost” depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable to perform a pre-reading notice effect by making a pre-determination as to whether or not "out of reach" occurs.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the display control commands 1 (display result 1) to 5 (display result) (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set and the type of big hit is "normal big hit", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is "01". .. Further, when the type of big hit is "probable variation big hit", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not the "probable variation big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02". .. Then, when it is neither "normal big hit" nor "probability variation big hit" (that is, when it is "a sudden probability variation big hit"), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (step S115).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when it is out of alignment, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S118).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S1122 described later. The storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Further, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set to be reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot ending processing, which will be described later, when terminating variable display of the special symbol or terminating the jackpot. Good.

Next, if the reserved storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the reserved storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state, the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the time saving state. Is reset (step S132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of big hit is "normal big hit", a big hit start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (command A002(H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is the sudden probability big hit, the small hit/sudden variation big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). It is judged based on.

In addition, the big hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of “normal big hit” or “probability variation big hit”, 2 times in the case of “sudden probability variation big hit”) is set in the special winning opening release counter (step S135). .. Also, the round time per round in the big hit game is set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 second, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probability big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S305) (step S136).

If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the hour/hour count counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the hour/hour state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the hour/hour counter by -1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the hour/hour counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the hour/hour flag (step S140).

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sends a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit start command (command A003(H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, two times) is set in the special winning opening opening counter (step S144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit start preprocessing (step S308) (step S145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160). If the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and the big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S162). Here, in the case of "normal big hit", the big hit end 1 designation command (command A301(H)) is transmitted, and in the case of "probability variation big hit" big hit end 2 designation command (command A302(H)) ) Is transmitted, and if it is a "sudden sudden change big hit", a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) is sent. Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) (step S163), and the process is ended.

In step S164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S166). Whether or not to end the big hit game based on the normal big hit, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". It can be determined by checking. When the big hit game based on the normal big hit is finished (Y in step S166), the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts the game state to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the hour/hour counter (step S168).

Unless the big hit game based on the normal big hit is ended (that is, if the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability big hit is terminated), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to change the game state to the probability variation state. Along with the shift (step S169), the time saving flag is set to shift the game state to the time saving state (step S170).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the processing described above is executed, when it is controlled to the probability variation state, it is also controlled to the time saving state. Therefore, as the gaming state, the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), a short-time state (low probability/high base state), and a stochastic state (high probability/high base state).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, during the execution of the special symbol changing process), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol display control for the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer (first special symbol or second special symbol). For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting. The variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, in the case of shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) which the special symbol pointer indicates. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting. The stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), for the special symbol variation display. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order not to cause a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the fluctuation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, fluctuation also occurs in the display result designation command transmission process. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by 1.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process process, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). .. After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the production control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the production display device 9 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes according to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected and the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. Display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number updating process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Then, it transfers to step S702.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is composed of the 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area to store the received command is used. The command reception number counter has a value of 0-11. The ring buffer format is not always required.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 13 and 14) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

33 to 35 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 6 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S618).

If the received effect control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this case, for example, when the big hit start 1 designation command is received, the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received production control command is a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (commands A301 to A302(H)) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S626). In this case, for example, when the big hit end 1 designation command is received, the big hit end 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit end 2 designation command is received, the big hit end 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received production control command is a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step S628).

If the received production control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S651). S652).

If the received production control command is any variation category command (step S653), the production control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S653). S654).

If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 sets the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S656). Further, the effect control CPU 101, the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first reserved storage number addition designation command. , And stores it in the first free storage area of the first start-up winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S657).

If the received effect control command is the second reserved storage number addition designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 101 sets the second reserved storage number to be stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S659). Further, the effect control CPU 101, the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second reserved storage number addition designation command. , And stores it in the first free storage area of the second start-winning-prize command storage area formed in the RAM (step S660).

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the start winning award command storage area and the active display storage area. Of these, FIG. 36(A) shows a specific example of the first start-winning command storage area, FIG. 36(B) shows a specific example of the second start-winning command storage area, and FIG. Shows a specific example of the active display storage area. As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the first start prize-winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. There is. Further, in the second start prize winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved memory number (4 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first starting opening switch passage processing and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second starting opening switch passage processing of FIG. 20, the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting opening. When there is a start winning to the winning opening 14, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command or second reserved storage number) within one timer interrupt. Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start prize-winning command storage area and the second start prize-winning command storage area, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation A storage area is secured so that commands can be associated and stored.

In this embodiment, since the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designating command within one timer interrupt, the effect control CPU 101 designates the symbol in the command analysis process. When the command and the variation category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designating command storage area and the variation category command storage area, respectively. Then, when the command for specifying the addition of the number of reserved storages is received, if the command for specifying the addition of the number of reserved storages is received, it is known that the first reserved memory is increased by 1, and the command for the addition of the number of reserved memories If it is received, it can be seen that the second reserved memory is increased by 1. Therefore, if the first reserved memory number addition designating command is received, the temporarily stored symbol designating command and variation category command The 1 reserved memory number addition designation command is stored in the first start winning prize command storage area, and if the 2nd reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the 2nd reserved memory is also stored along with the temporarily stored symbol designating command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the second start prize winning command storage area (note that in FIG. 36, the commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start prize winning command storage area, An example is shown in which the command is stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the command storage area at the time of start winning).

Note that each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is sequentially executed in steps S664 and S668, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbols each time the variable display of the effect symbols is started. To be deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, so first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start winning award command storage area shown in FIG. 36(B) are deleted. .. Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, so at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbol next, the first shown in FIG. 36(A). The contents stored in the first storage area 1 of the start prize winning command storage area are deleted, and the contents of the first start prize winning command storage area are shifted. For example, when variable display of a new effect symbol is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 36(A), each command stored in storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in storage area 2 is deleted. The commands are shifted to the storage area 1, the commands stored in the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2, and the commands stored in the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designating command that are received when the start winning is generated are also referred to as commands at the time of starting winning. In addition, among the commands at the time of winning the start prize, the reserved storage number addition designation command, which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number has increased, is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also called reserved storage information. In addition, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit determined in the winning effect production process (see FIG. 22) at the time of starting winning, the result of determination of the type of big hit, the symbol designating command which is a command showing the result of determination of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also called a winning determination result specification command or determination result information.

In addition, the first start prize winning command storage area, the second start prize winning command storage area, and the active display storage area store information regarding the display mode of the specific display (holding display, active display). Specifically, "display mode pattern", "change timing", and "operation frequency" are stored.

The “display mode pattern” is a change pattern of the display mode of the specific display, and any one of Pt1 to Pt4 is stored. Pt1 is a display mode pattern that does not change from white, Pt2 is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue, Pt3 is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue and then red, and Pt4 Is a display mode pattern that changes from white to red. The number of changes in the display mode is not limited to once or twice, and a display mode pattern in which the display mode can be changed three times or more may be provided. Further, a display mode pattern that starts from a display mode other than white (for example, a display mode pattern that starts display in blue or red) may be provided.

The “change timing” is a timing at which the display mode of the specific display changes, and is stored when the display mode is a display mode pattern (display mode pattern other than Pt1). Specifically, "active" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the active display, "first" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the first hold display, and the second Either the "second" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the hold display or the "third" indicating that the timing is displayed as the third hold display is stored. It

"Operation frequency" is the frequency of switching the display position (advance position, retreat position) of the hold display, and either "high frequency" with high switching frequency or "low frequency" with low switching frequency. Is stored.

If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number saving area ( Step S662). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the high base state flag indicating the high base state is set (step S663A), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S664. If it is not set, the first hold display and the active display are updated (step S663B). Specifically, the active display on the active display portion 18d is erased, and the first hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first first hold display of the hold storage display portion 18c is shifted to the active display portion 18d. When the second to fourth first hold displays of the hold storage display section 18c are lit, the first hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area, The first hold display displayed third is shifted to the second display area, and the first hold display displayed fourth is shifted to the third display area.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 updates the active storage area (step S663C). Specifically, the information about the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the first start-up winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 101, the command at the time of start winning stored in the first storage area of the command storage area at the time of the first start winning (designation command, variation category command, and first reserved storage number addition specification). (Command) and information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the first start prize-winning command storage area are shifted (step S664).

If the received effect control command is the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S665), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area ( Step S666). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S667A), and if not set, the process proceeds to step S668. If it is set, the second hold display is updated (step S667B). Specifically, the active display on the active display unit 18d is erased, and the second hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first second hold display of the hold storage display unit 18c is shifted to the active display unit 18d. If the second to fourth hold display section 18c is on and displayed, the second hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area, The second hold display displayed third is shifted to the second display area, and the second hold display displayed fourth is shifted to the third display area).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 updates the active storage area (step S667C). Specifically, the information about the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the second start-winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 101, the command at the time of starting winning stored in the first storage area of the second starting winning time command storage area (designation command, variation category command, and first reserved storage number addition specification). (Command) and information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the second start prize-winning command storage area are shifted (step S668).

If the received effect control command is the normal state background designating command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen in the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color). ) (Step S670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state (low probability/low base state), a background mode corresponding to the normal state is displayed to produce an effect mode according to the normal state (hereinafter, It is controlled to the normal production mode). Further, the effect control CPU 101, if set, resets the high base state flag (steps S671A and S671B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c from the second hold display to the first hold display. (Step S671C).

If the received effect control command is the time saving state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen in the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the time saving state (for example, a background screen with a green background color). ) (Step S673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), a background screen corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed to produce an effect mode (hereinafter, It is also controlled to a time saving effect mode). If not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time saving state flag (steps S674A and S674B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c from the first hold display to the second hold display (step). S674C).

If the received effect control command is the probability variation state background designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen in the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a background screen with a red background color). ) (Step S677). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability/high base state), a background mode corresponding to the probability variation state is displayed to produce an effect mode according to the probability variation state (hereinafter, It is controlled to the probability variation production mode). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S674A.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S679). For example, if the received production control command is a customer waiting demo designation command, a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold display control process for controlling the display mode of the hold display (step S800A). Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be referred to as "prefetching notice effect".

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the production symbols is realized. However, the control relating to the variable display of the production symbols in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed by different effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be possible to determine which special symbol variable display is being executed depending on which effect control process process the variable display of the effect symbol is being executed.

Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect design fluctuation start process (step S801).

Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (step S802).

Production symbol variation process (step S802): The switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) that constitutes the variation pattern is controlled, and the end of the variation time is monitored. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803).

Production symbol variation stop process (step S803): The variation of the production symbol is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the display result (stopped symbol) is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variable time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

Processing during round (step S805): Display control during round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S807).

Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

Big hit end production process (step S807): In the production display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a new start winning is generated and a new start winning command is received (step S3901). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start prize-winning command storage area or the second start prize-winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36, a new start winning occurs and a new start winning prize is generated. It can be determined that the command has been received. If no new start winning award command has been received, the hold display control process is terminated.

If a command for starting winning is newly received, it is determined whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S3902), and if it is not set (when it is in the low base state), a new hold is made. It is determined whether the storage is the first reserved storage (step S3903). Specifically, when the storage area storing the new start-winning command is the first start-winning command storage area, it is determined that the new reserved memory is the first reserved memory. If it is the second hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

If it is the first hold storage, it is determined whether the display mode pattern of all the first hold displays is Pt1 (step S3904). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1 is stored in the first start winning prize storage area shown in FIG. 36(A), all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are not Pt1. If it is determined that no display mode pattern other than Pt1 is stored in the first start winning prize storage area, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1. When the first hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists, the new display mode pattern of the first hold display is determined as Pt1 (step S3905), while the first hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists. If not, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern for the first hold display is performed (step S3906). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 39 is used to perform the display mode pattern determination lottery.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. In the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 39, the display mode patterns (Pt1 to Pt4, Pt1 to Pt4, depending on the winning determination result (probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot (abrupt confirmation jackpot) or small hit, super reach loss, etc.) ) Is assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 39, the ratio of the assigned decision values is shown for the sake of simplifying the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for display mode pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 39(A) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 1, and FIG. 39(B) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or more. It is a display mode pattern determination lottery table. Here, the “reserved storage number” means the first reserved storage number when the newly generated reserved storage is the first reserved storage (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S3906 is executed). That is, when the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S3924 is executed), it is the second pending storage number.

First, the first display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 39A will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1 is 20%, Pt2 is 30%, Pt4 is determined at a rate of 50%.

For example, when the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1 is 25% and Pt2 is 35%. , Pt4 is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1 is at a ratio of 50%. , Pt2 is determined to be 30% and Pt4 is determined to be 20%.

For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1 is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2 is determined at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode of the specific display can be changed only once for each change, when the number of pending storage is 1, the Pt3 having the number of changes of 2 is The configuration is not selected. If the display mode of the specific display can be changed a plurality of times during one change, Pt3 may be selectable even when the number of pending storage is one.

Next, the second display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 39(B) will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1 is 10%, Pt2 is 20%, Pt3 is determined at a ratio of 30% and Pt4 is determined at a ratio of 40%.

For example, when the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1 is 15% and Pt2 is 20%. , Pt3 is determined at a ratio of 30%, and Pt4 is determined at a ratio of 35%.

For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1 is 40%. , Pt2 is determined to be 30%, Pt3 is determined to be 20%, and Pt4 is determined to be 10%.

For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1 is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2 is determined at a rate of 10%.

As a result, the expectation for each display mode pattern is Pt1<Pt2<Pt3<Pt4. Further, the expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold display is white<blue<red. It should be noted that a display mode pattern that can be selected only when a big hit or a specific big hit may be provided. Further, a display mode (for example, rainbow) that can be changed only in the display mode pattern may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the display mode pattern is determined at the same rate when the winning determination result is the probability variation big hit and when it is the normal big hit, but the display mode patterns are set at different rates. It may be decided to decide. Similarly, the display mode pattern may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

Further, the ratio of determining the display mode pattern may be different depending on more detailed conditions. For example, the display mode pattern may be determined at different ratios based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variation category command, the presence/absence of pseudo continuous, or the number of pseudo continuous.

After step S3905 or step S3906, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1 is determined, the effect control CPU 101 executes the change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing of the display mode of the specific display (step). N of S3907, S3908). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery table is used to perform the change timing determination lottery.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a change timing determination lottery table. In the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40, according to the winning determination result (probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot, sudden variation jackpot (abrupt confirmation jackpot) or small hit, super-reach miss, etc.) and the number of reserved memories (1 to 4). The determination values corresponding to the change timing (active, first, second, and third) are assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 40, the assigned determination values are assigned to simplify the description. Is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

Note that, here, the "number of reserved memories" means the number of first reserved memories when the newly generated reserved memory is the first reserved memory (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S3908 is executed) That is, when the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S3926 is executed), it is the second pending storage count.

40(A) is a first change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 1 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt2 or Pt4), and FIG. 40(B) is the number of changes. 2 is a second change timing determination lottery table used when (2) (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt3).

First, the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40(A) will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", and the winning determination result is a probability big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "third" is At a rate of 40%, "second" is determined at a rate of 30%, "first" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 10%.

For example, when the number of stored memories is "4" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third" Is 37%, the "second" is 33%, the "first" is 17%, and the "active" is 13%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), the ratio of "3rd" is 13%, "2nd" is 17%, "1st" is 33%, and "Active" is 37%. It

For example, if the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is other, the “third” is 10%, the “second” is 20%, and the “first” is Is determined at a rate of 30%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "second Is determined at a rate of 50%, "first" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second" Is 40%, the "first" is 35%, and the "active" is 25%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), the "second" is determined at a rate of 25%, the "first" is determined at a rate of 35%, and the "active" is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, if the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is other, the ratio of “second” is 20%, “first” is 30%, and “active” is It is determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "2", and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "first piece" Is determined at a rate of 70%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 30%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "first" Is determined at a rate of 60%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), "first" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 60%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is other, the "first" is determined at a rate of 30% and the "active" is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved storages is "1", "active" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Next, the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40(B) will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "third" and 30% of the "2nd" combination, 25% of the "3rd" and "1st" combination, and 20% of the "3rd" and "active" combination Then, the combination of the "second" and the "first" is 13%, the combination of the "second" and "active" is 7%, and the combination of the "first" and the "active" is 7%. The combination is determined at a rate of 5%.

For example, when the number of stored memories is "4" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third" And the combination of "2nd" is 20%, the combination of "3rd" and "1st" is 25%, and the combination of "3rd" and "active" is 25%. In terms of proportion, the combination of "second" and "first" is 15%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 10%, and "first" and "active" The combination of is determined at a rate of 5%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case of), the combination of "3rd" and "2nd" is 5%, the combination of "3rd" and "1st" is 10%, "3rd" and "3rd" The combination of "active" is 15%, the combination of "second" and "first" is 25%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 25%, The combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is other, the combination of "third" and "second" is 5%, "third" and "1". The combination of "the third" is 7%, the combination of "the third" and "active" is 13%, the combination of the "second" and "the first" is 20%, The combination of "second" and "active" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 30%.

In addition, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a probability big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "the second one" 50% of the combination of "1" and "1st", 30% of the combination of "2nd" and "active", and 20% of the combination of "1st" and "active" Is decided.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second" And the combination of "first" is 40%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 35%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is 25%. ,It is determined.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). Case), the combination of the "second" and the "first" is 25%, the combination of the "second" and "active" is 35%, the "first" and the "active". 40% of the combinations are determined.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is other, the combination of the “second” and the “first” is 20%, the “second” and the “active”. The combination of "" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved storages is “2”, the combination of “first” and “active” is determined at a rate of 100%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the structure in which the reliability of the big hit is higher as the display mode changes at an earlier timing after the hold display is started, is not limited to this. The reliability of the big hit may be low as the display mode changes at an early timing after the hold display is started.

Note that in the present embodiment, the change timing is determined using the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 40, but the change timing is determined at different rates based on which display mode is changed. It may be done. For example, in the case of changing to red, the timing (for example, “active”) that is later than the case of changing to blue may be determined as the change timing.

In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined at the same rate depending on whether the winning determination result is the probability varying big hit or the normal big hit, but the changing timing is determined at different rates. It may be that. Similarly, the change timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

Further, the rate of determining the change timing may be different depending on more detailed conditions. For example, the change timing may be determined at different rates based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variation category command, the presence/absence of pseudo-repeating, or the number of pseudo-repeating.

After the execution of Y in step S3907 or step S3908, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the first start prize-winning command storage area (step S3909), and sets a low operation frequency. It is stored (step S3910). Then, a new first hold display in white is started (step S3911).

When the high base state flag is set in step S3902, it is determined whether the new pending storage is the second pending storage (step S3921). Specifically, if the storage area in which the new start-winning command is stored is the second start-winning command storage area, it is determined that the new reserved memory is the second reserved memory. If it is the first hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

If it is the second hold storage, it is determined whether the display mode pattern of all the second hold displays is Pt1 (step S3922). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1 is stored in the second start winning prize storage area shown in FIG. 36B, all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are not Pt1. When it is determined that no display mode pattern other than Pt1 is stored in the second start winning prize storage area, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1. When the second hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists, the new display mode pattern of the second hold display is determined to be Pt1 (step S3923), while the second hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 exists. If not, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern for the second hold display is performed (step S3924). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery table is used to perform the display mode pattern determination lottery.

After step S3923 or step S3924, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1 is determined, the effect control CPU 101 executes the change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing (N in step S3925, S3926). .. Specifically, the change timing determination lottery table is used to perform the change timing determination lottery.

After the execution of Y in step S3925 or step S3926, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the second start prize-winning command storage area (step S3927), and sets the operation frequency to a low frequency. It is stored (step S3928). Then, a new second hold display in white is started (step S3929).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect design variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. , Based on the receipt of the variation pattern command, it shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing and starts the variation display of the effect symbol, so the variation of the effect symbol is not received by the variation pattern command but only the display result designation command is received. The display does not start.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect design display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). (Symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, whereby the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop of the effect symbol) is performed in accordance with the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. In addition, when the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S8002 that a chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo pattern. , A combination of a big hit design that does not reach and one design that is offset by one) are also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on only the variation pattern command. ..

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 43, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. As a design, the combination of the effect designs in which the three designs have the same even number is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates “probability variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. The combination of the effect symbols arranged in the same odd number symbol is determined.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 4 designation command or the display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "disappearance" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), combinations of effect symbols other than the above are determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The production control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop design, and uses a stop design determination table in which data indicating a combination of production designs and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop design of the production design. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that reminds of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right sides are all the same symbol) is called a big hit symbol. Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed in a state where the left, middle and right are aligned with odd symbols, it is recalled that the odd symbols are probability variation jackpots. A pattern that reminds us of such a sudden change jackpot is called a sudden change pattern. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the case of a normal big hit, since the left, middle and right are stopped and displayed in a state where even symbols are aligned, it is recalled that even-numbered symbols are not sure-variable big hits (normally big hits). .. Such a pattern that reminds me that it does not become a probability variation jackpot is called a non-probability variation pattern. In addition, a stop design that reminds the user of disengagement is called a disengagement design.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect (a notice effect other than the look-ahead notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, or a dialogue notice effect) on the effect display device 9 during the variable display of the effect symbol. A notice effect setting process for determining whether or not or setting an effect mode of notice effect is executed (step S8003).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes the operation frequency determination process for determining the operation frequency of the specific display (hold display, active display) (step S8003A).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a change pattern, a notice effect when executing the notice effect, and a process table corresponding to the change effect when executing the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 101 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display devices (effect parts) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect design are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control to display effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 44 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern. When it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8004.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

Further, the effect control CPU 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (effect display device 9 as effect parts, effect parts as effect parts). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. However, the effect control CPU 101 uses the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8007).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect in the effect of changing the effect design (step S802) (step S8008).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the operation frequency determination processing. In the operation frequency determination process, the effect control CPU 101 performs a process (steps S4500 to S4506) for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the variation to be started, the type of the change effect when executing, and the specific display of the execution target. After the execution, the processing (steps S4507 to S4511) for determining the operation frequency of each specific display is executed.

First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the red specific display is displayed (step S4500), and if it is displayed, moves to step S4507. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode is changed only for the single specific display, when the red specific display (specific display of the most reliable display mode) is already displayed, Even if the change effect is executed, further change in the display mode cannot be expected, so the change effect cannot be executed. It should be noted that even if it is not possible to expect a further change in the display mode, the change effect may be able to be executed, and if the gaming machine is capable of changing the display mode of a plurality of specific displays, it is the most reliable. The change effect may be executable even when the specific display in the high display mode is displayed.

When the red specific display is not displayed, the effect control CPU 101 executes the change effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the variation to be started (step S4501). Specifically, the change effect execution lottery is performed using the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG.

FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram showing a change effect execution lottery table. In the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 46(A), the presence or absence of execution of the change effect and the type of change effect when the change effect is executed according to the presence or absence of the change schedule of the specific display in the start fluctuation (the change schedule in the fluctuation). Although determination values corresponding to (first change effect, second change effect) are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 46(A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown to simplify the description. Has been done. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for change effect execution lottery, and determines it as a decision item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

It should be noted that, regarding the presence or absence of a change plan of the specific display in the variation to be started, the command storing area for the command for starting winning a prize shown in FIG. 36 (if the variation to be started is a variation based on the first reserved memory, the command for the first starting winning a prize) If the storage area and the variation to be started are those based on the second reserved memory, the determination is made based on the second start winning award command storage area). At this point in time, since the start winning award command storage area is not updated (steps S664 and S668) based on the start of the variation, the information regarding the variation to be started is one of the starting winning award command storage areas. It is stored in the eye storage area. Therefore, "active" is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, "first" is stored as the change timing in the second storage area, or the change in the third storage area is stored. If the "second" is stored as the timing or the "third" is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

For example, when there is a change schedule, the first change effect is determined to be executed at a rate of 70%, and the second change effect is determined to be performed at a rate of 30%. When there is no change plan, it is determined that the first change effect is executed at a rate of 3%, the second change effect is performed at a rate of 7%, and the change effect is not executed at a rate of 90%. It

In this way, when there is a planned change, any change effect is executed. That is, the display mode can be changed only when the change effect is executed.

In this way, when there is a change schedule, the first change effect is executed at a higher rate than the second change effect, and when there is no change schedule, the second change effect is the first change effect. Is configured to run at a higher rate than. As a result, the display mode of the specific effect is changed at a higher rate when the first change effect is executed than when the second change effect is executed. Therefore, it indicates whether or not the display mode of the specific display has changed depending on the type of change effect.

In the present embodiment, the first change effect and the second change effect are provided as the types of change effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a change effect in which the display mode of the specific display always changes at the time of execution may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is determined after determining the type of change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined prior to the type of change effect, and the type of change effect is determined based on the operation frequency (for example, if the frequency is low, the second change effect is likely to be selected). Good.

After step S4501, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the change effect (step S4502). If not, the process proceeds to step S4507. When executing a change effect, it is determined whether there is a change schedule (step S4503), and when there is no change schedule (that is, when the change effect is executed but the display mode does not change), a blue specific display. Is displayed (step S4503A), and if not displayed, the execution target determination lottery for determining the specific display of the execution target of the change effect is executed (step S4503B). Specifically, the execution target determination lottery is performed using the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46(B).

FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram showing an execution target determination lottery table. In the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46(B), a change effect execution target (active display, first hold display, second hold display, third hold display) in accordance with the number of held memories. Although the determination value corresponding to is assigned, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in the example shown in FIG. 46(B) in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for execution target determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

Note that, here, the “reserved storage number” is the first reserved storage number when the variation to be started is the variation based on the first retained storage, and is the variation based on the second reserved storage when it is the variation. It is the second number of reserved memories. It should be noted that at this stage, the subtraction of the number of pending storages (steps S662 and S666) based on the start of the fluctuation is not performed.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “4”, the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 40%, the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%, and the second display is performed. It is determined that the holding display of No. 2 is an execution target at a rate of 20%, and the third pending display is an execution target at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3”, the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 60%, the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%, and the second It is determined at a rate of 20% that the pending display of is targeted for execution.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “2”, the active display is determined to be executed at a rate of 80%, and the first suspended display is determined to be executed at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of pending storage is “1”, the active display is determined to be executed at a rate of 100%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the active display is configured to be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for fluctuations during execution.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the hold display that is already displayed can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, but here, the execution target of the change effect in which the display mode does not change (so-called gasse effect) is set. In order to determine, the pending display which is not displayed may be the execution target. For example, when the number of stored memories is “3” (that is, when only the active display, the first suspended display, and the second suspended display are displayed when the change effect is executed). Also, the third hold display can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, and when the third hold display is determined as the execution target, the change effect is displayed in the display area of the third hold display. It may be performed (the hammer swings in the case of the first change effect, and the arrow passes by in the case of the second change effect).

In S4503A, when the blue specific display is displayed, the blue specific display is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S4504). This makes it possible to give the player an expectation that the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue will further change. Even when the specific display in which the display mode is already changed to blue is displayed, a change effect (a change effect in which the display mode does not change) in which another specific display (white specific display) is executed. (So-called production) may be executed. However, even if the specific display that has already changed to blue is already displayed, it is possible that the player will be stressed if the gasse effect that targets the other specific display is frequently executed. To be Therefore, even with a configuration capable of executing a gaze effect in which a specific display that is different from the specific display that has already changed to blue is executable, a change effect that targets the specific display that has already changed to blue is executed. It is desirable to perform at a high rate.

If there is a change schedule in step S4503, the specific display (active display, hold display) that is the change schedule is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S4505). As described above, at this point in time, since the start winning award command storage area based on the start of the change (steps S664 and S668) is not performed, the specific display corresponding to the storage area 1 is changed. If it is a schedule, "Active" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 2 is scheduled to change, "1st" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 3 is scheduled to change, "2nd" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 4 is scheduled to change, "third" is determined as the execution target of the change effect.

After executing any of steps S4503B, S4504, and S4505, the effect control CPU 101 sets the type of change effect to be executed and the specific display of the execution target (step S4506). The change effect is executed by selecting the process table corresponding to the change effect of the content set here in step S8004 and executing step S8006 or step S8105 described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 101, the holding specific value K for specifying what number of the hold display (namely, if K=1, the first hold display, if K=2, the two hold display. "1" is set to the eye hold display, the third hold display if K=3, and the fourth hold display if K=4 (step S4507), and the operation frequency of each specific display is set. The operation frequency determination lottery for determining is executed. Specifically, the operation frequency determination lottery table is used to perform the operation frequency determination lottery.

FIG. 46C is an explanatory diagram showing an operation frequency determination lottery table. In the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46(C), the presence/absence of a change in the display mode of the specific display (change plan of the K-th hold display) and change effect (change effect to the K-th hold display). The determination value corresponding to the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) is assigned according to the above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 46C, the ratio of the assigned determination value is It is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for operation frequency determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

Whether or not the display mode of the specific display is scheduled to change is determined with reference to the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Specifically, if the reserved specific number K=1, “active” is stored as the fluctuation timing in the first storage area, or if the reserved specific number K=2, the fluctuation timing in the second storage area. “1st” is stored, or if the reserved specific number K=3, then “second” is stored as the change timing in the third storage area, or the reserved specific number K=4. For example, when the “third” is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

The “change effect” is determined based on the type of change effect and the execution target set in step S4506. For example, if the specific hold number K=1, the active display is set as the execution target, and if the specific hold number K=2, the first pending display is set as the execution target, the specific hold number K. =3, the second hold display is set as an execution target, and the hold specific number K=4, the third hold display is set as an execution target. It is determined that the change effect is executed.

For example, when there is a change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 20% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 80%. When there is a change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 30% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, for example, when there is no change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined to be 40% and the high frequency is determined to be 60%. When there is no change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined to be 45% and the high frequency is determined to be 55%. When there is no change schedule and the change effect is not executed, the low frequency is determined to be 90% and the high frequency is determined to be 10%.

As described above, as the operation mode of the specific display, which is the execution target of the change effect, the high frequency is more easily determined than the low frequency. Therefore, the specific display having the high frequency of operation is more likely to be the target of change effect execution than the specific display having the low frequency.

Further, the specific display having the change schedule is configured such that the high frequency is more easily determined as the operation frequency than the specific display having no change schedule. Therefore, whether or not there is a change is suggested by the operation frequency.

In the present embodiment, the high frequency and the low frequency are provided as the operation frequencies, but a fixed operation frequency that can be selected only when the change effect is executed may be provided. The player is informed that the change effect will be executed by performing the confirmation operation frequency.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the high frequency is selected as the operation frequency in the specific display having the change schedule at a higher rate than in the specific display having no change schedule. It is not limited. For example, when the specific display with the planned change is displayed, the high frequency is selected as the operation frequency at a higher rate as compared with the case where the specific display with the planned change is not displayed (that is, the changed frequency). Even if the specific display has no schedule, a high frequency is likely to be selected as the operation frequency when a specific display having a change schedule is displayed as another specific display). In addition, the higher the frequency, the higher the ratio may be selected for the specific display that is displayed closer to the specific display that is scheduled to change.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the operation mode of the Kth hold display (step S4509). For example, if K=1, it is the first storage area, if K=2, it is the second storage area, if K=3, it is the third storage area, and if K=4. “High frequency” or “low frequency” is stored as the operation mode in the fourth storage area. The reserved specific number K and the number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the first reserved memory, and the second reserved memory number if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the second reserved memory) ) Is the same value (step S4510). If they are not the same value, 1 is added to the reserved specific number K (step S4511), and the process proceeds to step S4508 again. In this way, the operation frequencies for all the stored storages are determined one by one. The operation frequency determination process ends when the reserved specific number K and the reserved storage number have the same value.

Note that in step S4508, an operation mode other than the operation frequency may be determined instead of or in addition to the operation frequency. For example, it may be determined whether the mole displayed as the specific display is in a pop-out mode or in a rotating mode.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the effect in the effect control process process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation process, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S8101), and the value of the fluctuation time timer is decremented by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

After that, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a display position fixing flag indicating that the display position of the specific display is fixed is set (step S4700A), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S4707. .. The display position fixing flag is a flag that is set during execution of the first change effect, that is, during the execution of the first change effect, the processes of steps S4701 to S4706 (process for changing the display position of the specific display). ) Is not executed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is restricted during execution of the first change effect, but at least the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect. If the display position of the other specific display is restricted, the display position of the other specific display may not be restricted.

If the display position fixing flag is not set in step S4700A, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the preset display position change timing (step S4700B). In the present embodiment, the display position change timing is set to an even second after the start of fluctuation, that is, the display position can be changed every 2 seconds. The display position change timing may be determined by lottery or may be determined for each variation pattern.

When it is the display position change timing (Y in step S4700B), the specific display specific number R (R=1 indicates the first specific display (that is, active) when specifying the specific display number. Display), if R=2, the second specific display (that is, the first reserved display), if R=3, the third specific display (that is, the second reserved display), R =4, 1 is set to the fourth specific display (that is, the third reserved display) (step S4701), and the display position of the specific display specified by the specific display specific number R is switched. Display position switching lottery for determining whether or not is executed (step S4702). Specifically, the display position switching lottery table is used to perform the display position switching lottery.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a display position switching lottery table. In the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG. 48, the determination value corresponding to the presence/absence of switching of the display position is assigned according to the operation frequency, but in the example shown in FIG. 48, the assignment value is assigned to simplify the description. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. The effect control CPU 101, for example, extracts a random number for display position switching lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, when the operation frequency is high, the display position is switched at a rate of 70% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 30%. Further, for example, when the operation frequency is low, the display position is switched at a rate of 20% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 80%.

When it is determined to switch the display position (Y in step S4703), if the display position of the R-th specific display is the retreat position, it is switched to the advance position, and if it is the advance position, it is changed to the retreat position (step S4704). Then, the value of the specific display specific number R is the number of pending storages (the first pending storage number if the variation to be executed is based on the first pending storage, and the second if the variation to be executed is based on the second pending storage. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the value obtained by adding 1 to (reserved storage number) (step S4705), and if it is not the same value, 1 is added to the specific display specific number R and the process proceeds to step S4702 again. In this way, the presence/absence of switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is determined one by one. If the values are the same, the process moves to step S4707.

In step S4707, the effect control CPU 101 sets the display position fixing flag (step S4707A) if it is the execution timing of the first change effect (Y in step S4707), and the display mode of the specific display of the change effect execution target. Is determined to be changed (step S4708). When the change is scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the advance position (step S4709). If the change is not scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the retracted position (step S4710). Thereby, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode is changed if the display position of the specific display of the execution object of the first change effect is the advance position, and the display mode is not changed if it is the retracted position. It has become.

In step S4711, the effect control CPU 101 resets the display position fixing flag if it is the end timing of the change effect (Y in step S4711), if it is set (step S4711A), and specifies the execution target of the change effect. It is determined whether or not the display mode of (1) is to be changed (step S4712), and if the display mode is to be changed, the display mode of the specific display of the execution target is changed (step S4713). Note that in step S4713, the specific display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the type of change effect (for example, when the first change effect is executed, the expression mode is switched from the expressionless expression mode to the display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweating is performed. On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which tears are shed), and then the color changes to blue or red. When the color is changed to blue or red, the expressionless display mode is switched again.

Then, if the variation time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the effect symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare production is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare production has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process for displaying the stop symbol of the production symbol in step S8302 is executed. No, the process moves to step S8305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (delayed symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302).

After that, the effect control CPU 101 clears the operation frequency storage area in the starting winning command storage area and the active display storage area (step S5301). As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is updated for each change.

Further, the effect control CPU 101, when neither the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101. Shifts to step S8311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that or the small hit/sudden variation big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit/sudden variation big hit start designation command reception flag has been set (step S8305). .. When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit/sudden-variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag that has been set.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1, the rendering device (the rendering display device 9 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, the speaker 27 as the rendering component, and the movable member 78 as the rendering component and rendering. Control of blade accessory 79a, 79b) is executed (step S8309).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process (for example, as shown in step S811 of FIG. 41, a variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, for the symbol variation designation command, since it is referred to in both the production control process process and the fourth symbol process process, as shown in this embodiment, the production symbol variation stop process at the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset in or in the big hit end effect processing when the big hit ends. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 9 when the change effect is executed. For example, FIGS. 50(A1) to (A3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the hold display whose display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50(A1), an active display 51 and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first reserved display 52 is the advanced position, and the other specific displays (active display 51, reserved display 53, 54) are the retracted positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 50(A2), the first change effect for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the advance position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 52 hit by the hammer X is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is discharged. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(A3), the display mode of the first hold display 52 on which the first change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

Further, for example, FIGS. 50(B1) to (B3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50(B1), an active display 51 and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 50(B2), the first change effect for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the hammer X in the first change effect does not hit the first hold display 52. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(B3), the display mode of the first hold display 52 on which the first change effect is executed does not change.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a different rate depending on the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect (100% changes in the advance position and the retracted position). If so, it does not change 100%).

Further, for example, FIGS. 51(A1) to (A3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(A1), an active display 51 and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first reserved display 52 is the advanced position, and the other specific displays (active display 51, reserved display 53, 54) are the retracted positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 51(A2), the second change effect is executed for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the advance position. At this time, the first hold display 52 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 51(A3), the display mode of the first hold display 52 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

Further, for example, FIGS. 51(B1) to (B3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect is executed for the hold display in which the display position is the retracted position. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(B1), an active display and three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as the specific display 51, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 51(B2), the second change effect for the first hold display 52 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 52 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 51(B3), the display mode of the first hold display 52 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position. Has become. Even when the second change effect is executed, a pattern in which the shot Y does not hit the specific display is provided as a pattern in which the display mode of the specific display to be executed does not change.

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and a mode involving operation (in this example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, A specific display (in this example, an active display corresponding to a change in execution) corresponding to a variable display in a mode in which the expression is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat and the display mode in which tears are flown) The display mode of the specific display (in this example, the display color (white, blue, red). The display, the pattern, the position, the range, etc. can be displayed. (In the present example, the active display is displayed by performing steps S663B and S667B in the effect control microcomputer 100, and the hold display is displayed by performing steps S3911 and S3929). Then, a portion that changes the display mode of the specific display by performing step S4713) and a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display (in this example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)). ) Can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the change effect in step S4506, selects the process table according to the change effect in step S8004, and executes steps S8006 and S8105). (A part that executes change effect by performing).

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means operates the specific display when the suggestive effect is executed (in this example, the display position (extended position, retracted position). The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different ratios depending on other operation modes such as (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward). By performing steps S4707 to S4709, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the display mode of the specific display at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. On the other hand, when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%. )) decided. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of displaying both the active display and the hold display, and both of them can be displayed in a mode involving operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed in a mode that involves an operation. Further, for example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed.

Further, although the active mode and the hold mode have common operation modes and display modes, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active mode and the hold mode can be displayed in different operation modes and display modes. May be

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode pattern and the change timing are determined at the time of starting winning, and the presence/absence of the change effect and the operation frequency are determined at the start of the variation, but the determination timing is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode pattern may not be determined at the time of starting winning, but whether or not to change the display mode during the variation may be determined at each variation start (that is, the change timing is also determined at the variation start time). Alternatively, the presence/absence of a change effect or the operation frequency may be determined at the time of winning the start prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum four held displays can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if both the first hold display and the second hold display can be displayed, a maximum of eight hold displays can be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a change effect is suggested that suggests a change in the display mode of a single specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a change in the display mode of a plurality of specific displays is collectively performed. It may be possible to execute the change effect suggested by. For example, a change effect may be executed that suggests that two arrows are shot toward different specific displays and the display mode of the specific display hit by the arrows changes.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, only when a part of a plurality of types of suggestive effects (first change effect) is executed, it differs depending on whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position. Although the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the ratio, when executing all types of suggestive effects, the specific display of the specific display changes at different ratios depending on whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position. The display mode may be changed.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the suggestive effect executing means causes the first suggestive effect (first change effect in this example) and the second suggestive effect (second change effect in this example). It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of suggestive effects including and (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes any of the change effects by performing steps S8004, S8006, and S8105. The specific display means can display the specific display in different operation modes when the suggested effect to be executed is the first suggested effect and the second suggested effect (in this example, effect control). By performing step S4713, the microcomputer 100 for use switches from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are open and sweating is performed to display the specific display while performing the first change effect, while the second change is performed. When executing the effect, the expressionless display mode is switched to the display mode in which tears are shed to display the specific display. The operation frequency may be changed depending on which suggestive effect is executed.) .. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display after the change effect is executed is different depending on the executed change effect, but before or during the change effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display may be different depending on the change effect to be executed. For example, when a change effect in which an apple falls from the sky is executed, the display mode of the specific display may be switched to a mode in which the mouth is opened before the apple is displayed, or after the apple is displayed. The display mode of the specific display may be switched in such a manner that the mouth is opened before the apple reaches the specific display.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display unit operates in a specific display operation mode (in this example, operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency). It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different ratios depending on the (advance position, retreat position) and the display direction (for example, downward or rightward). The control microcomputer 100 executes step S4508 by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46C, so that the operation frequency of the specific display, which is the execution object of the change effect, is high and low. The change rate of the display mode is different depending on the frequency.) This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode that involves an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (in this example, the display position (extend (The position, the withdrawal position) are switched), and the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is By executing step S4508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46(C), a change effect (first change effect, first change effect when the operation frequency is high compared to when the operation frequency is low). 2 change production) is easy to execute). This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display by switching between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position). In the example, the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute steps S4704, S4709, and S4710), and when the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode, the display of the specific display is performed. It is possible to change the mode (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4713 so that the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. The display mode of the specific display can be changed). This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect executing means includes a plurality of types of suggestions including a first suggestion effect (first change effect in this example) and a second suggestion effect (second change effect in this example). It is possible to execute any of the suggested effects (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes any of the change effects by performing steps S8004, S8006 and S8105), and the specific display means is The specific display can be displayed by switching between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the step (S4704, S4709, S4710 can be executed), and when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode when the first suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed (in this example, By performing steps S4707 to S4713, the effect control microcomputer 100 can change the display mode of the specific display when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. On the other hand, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4711 to S4713). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display, which is the execution target of the second change effect, is the advance position or the retracted position). As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that the display mode of the specific display controls the advantageous state (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the display shown in FIG. 39 in steps S3906 and S3924). By determining the display mode pattern using the mode pattern determination lottery table, the display mode changes the reliability of the big hit (white <blue <red) is suggested), and the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the operation mode of the specific display. It is possible to indicate whether or not (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the operation frequency by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 46C in step S4508. Therefore, it is assumed that the reliability (low frequency <high frequency) for changing the display mode of the specific display is suggested. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific display that suggests whether or not the display mode changes by the operation mode (specific display on the suggesting side) and a specific display that suggests whether or not the display mode changes (implication The specific display) is the same specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, even if the specific display of the suggesting side and the specific display of the suggested side are different from each other. Good. For example, it may be suggested that the display mode of the specific display B displayed adjacent to the specific display A changes depending on whether or not the operation frequency of the specific display A is high.

In this embodiment, two types of suggestive effects are provided, but only one type of suggestive effect may be provided, or three or more types of suggestive effects may be provided. It may be that

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. ..

Further, in this embodiment, the pending change pattern and the change timing are decided by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (that is, data that determines in advance which display mode at which timing) is provided, and the pending change according to any of the data is performed. It may be determined by lottery whether to perform.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed at a timing before the next change after the hold display is started (for example, during the change being executed when the hold display is started). Although the aspect is configured so as not to change, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the display aspect of the hold display at a timing before the start of the next change after the hold display is started. Good. For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changeable during the change being executed when the hold display is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the hold display is always low from the start of the display of the hold display to the start of the next change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the frequency may be high, or either high frequency or low frequency may be selected by a lottery at the time of winning the start prize. In that case, it is desirable that the display mode of the hold display can be changed at a timing before the start of the next change after the start of the hold display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display displayed at the start of fluctuation is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of all displayable specific displays (one active display and four reserved displays) may be always determined regardless of the number of stored storages that are actually stored. For example, in consideration of a case where a start winning occurs and a third or fourth hold display is displayed during a change in which two hold memories are stored, the third or the fourth hold display is performed at the start of the change. It is also possible to determine the operation frequencies of all displayable specific displays including the second hold display (all operation frequencies of one active display and four hold displays are determined at the start of each change). Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start winning command storage area for storing information on the hold display and the active display storage area for storing information on the active display are provided respectively. The information regarding the pending display and the information regarding the active display may be stored in a common storage area. In that case, in steps S4501, S4503B, S4508, and S4702, the processing is performed by referring to the common storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the presence/absence of display position switching is determined by lottery based on the operation frequency, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fixed operation pattern (a pattern in which which display position is switched at which timing) is provided for each operation frequency, and the display position may be switched based on the operation pattern. .. For example, as a high-frequency operation pattern, an operation pattern that repeats displaying for 2 seconds at the retreat position and then for 3 seconds at the advance position is provided, and as a low-frequency operation pattern for 5 seconds at the retreat position. It is also possible to provide an operation pattern that repeats displaying for 8 seconds at the advance position after displaying.

When determining whether or not to execute the change effect, if the specific display whose display mode is already changed is displayed, the execution rate of the change effect may be increased. For example, when the blue specific display is already displayed, the change effect execution rate may be increased. As a result, the player can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed. In the gaming machine in which the display mode can be changed in a plurality of stages, if there is a specific display that has already changed to the display mode in the final stage, even if a change effect for executing the specific display is executed. Since it is not possible to give the player a sense of expectation, it is possible to restrict the execution of the change effect whose execution target is the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined one by one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation frequencies of a plurality of specific displays may be collectively determined. For example, a combination of operation frequencies (high frequency, low frequency) in each specific hold may be selected.

In the present embodiment, the display position of the specific display, which is the target of execution of the first change effect, is forcibly switched (when it changes, the display position is switched to the advance position and changed. If not, switch to the retreat position. See steps S4707 to S4710.) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display position of the specific display of the execution target is the advancing position by chance when executing the first change effect. The display mode of the specific display may be changed (for example, when the display position has been switched to the advance position in step S4704). Specifically, the final display mode (which display mode is changed) is determined at the time of winning the start (at that time, the change timing is not determined), and the specific display is not yet changed to the final display mode. On the other hand, if the first change effect can be executed, and the timing at which the first change effect is executed matches the timing at which the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advanced position, the display mode of the specific display May be changed.

In that case, if the variation corresponding to the specific display is started (that is, when the active display is displayed as the specific display) and the final display mode is not changed, the display mode of the active display is displayed. May be forcibly changed to the final display mode. Specifically, the first change effect may be executed and the display position of the active display may be forcibly switched to the advance position to change to the final display mode, or the display position of the active display may be changed regardless of the display position. It is also possible to change to the final display mode by executing a change effect (which may be the second change effect or another change effect) that changes the display mode.

Further, the specific display may be displayed so that the way of movement varies depending on the display mode. For example, when the specific display is white, it may be displayed by rotating, when it is blue, it may be displayed as jumping, and when it is red, it may be displayed as running around.

In the present embodiment, the reliability of changing to red by determining the display mode pattern with the selection ratio shown in FIG. 39 is white<blue. For example, the ratio of big hits and small hits is extremely lower than the ratio of big hits, and in general, the number of reserved memories at the time of winning is often 2 or more than that of FIG. Focusing on the case where the determination result at the time of winning in the second display mode pattern determination lottery table in B) is SP reach out or other, Pt4 (white color) when Pt1 to Pt4 (display mode pattern including white color) is selected From the display mode pattern that changes from red to Pt2 and Pt3 (display mode pattern that changes from blue to red) when Pt2 and Pt3 (display mode pattern that includes blue) are selected. The percentage is higher. As a result, blue is more likely to change to red than white.

Further, a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed, and a display mode of another specific display that is different from the changed specific display while the changed specific display is being displayed. The suggestive effect that suggests the change may be executed in a manner in which at least a part is common. Specifically, description will be made using Modification 1 below. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In Modification 1, the effect control microcomputer 100 can change the display mode of the plurality of specific displays. Specifically, the processing of steps S3904, S3905, S3922, and S3923 of FIG. 38 in the above-described embodiment (that is, a new pending storage is performed while the specific display of the display mode pattern in which the display mode changes is already displayed. When it occurs, the display mode of the plurality of specific displays can be changed by not executing the process of setting the display mode pattern of the new hold display to Pt1).

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 9 when executing the second change effect in the first modification. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(1), the active display 51 and the three hold displays 52 to 54 are displayed as the specific displays, and the display mode of the first hold display 52 is blue, and The display mode of the specific display (active display 51, hold display 53, 54) is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 52(1), the common second change effect (effect in which the arrow Y is shot) is executed regardless of which specific display is to be executed.

When the first hold display 52 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, the arrow Y hits the first hold display 52 as shown in FIGS. 52(2) and (3). However, the display mode changes from blue to red.

52(4), when a specific display (specifically, the second hold display 53) different from the first hold display 52 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, FIG. As shown in 5), the arrow Y hits the second hold display 53, and the display mode changes from white to blue.

As described above, in the modified example 1, the suggestion effect executing means causes the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, the first reserved display shown in FIGS. 52(1) and 52(2)). 52) The suggestive effect suggesting a change in the display mode (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 52(1) and 52(2)) and the changed specific display in the state where the changed specific display is displayed. Suggestive effects (for example, FIGS. 52(1), (4), and FIG. 52(1), (4), The second change effect shown in (5) can be executed in a mode in which at least a part is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 52(1)). As a result, the effect contents can be made to have an unexpected effect, and the effect effect can be improved.

In this modification 1, the specific display in which the suggestion effect executed in a mode at least partially common to the suggestion effect suggesting the change in the display mode of the changed specific display is the changed specific display is the specific display indicating the change. Although it is supposed that the display is adjacent to, it is not limited to this. For example, a hold display and an active display that are not adjacent to each other may be used.

Further, in the first modification, the case where a single changed specific display is displayed has been described, but similar processing is executed even when a plurality of changed specific displays are displayed. Good.

Further, although this modified example 1 has been described using the example of the second change effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the first suggesting a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed. In a mode in which at least a part is common, the change effect and the first change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the changed specific display while the changed specific display is displayed It may be executed (for example, the hammer is displayed in a common mode of moving left and right, and then stopped at the upper part of the specific display of the execution target).

Further, the specific display means includes at least the specific display corresponding to the variable display, the normal mode, the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the second specific mode suggesting the effect content. Can be displayed in the display mode of, and the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode can be performed, and after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode The display mode of the specific display may be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by is executed. Specifically, description will be made using Modification 2 below. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the second modification, as a display mode of the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode showing a reliability for a big hit (probability change/normal/a sudden probability big hit) or a small hit, and a predetermined effect. The effect suggestion display mode for suggesting the execution of is provided.

The normal display mode includes “white” displayed in white, “red” displayed in red, and “gold” displayed in gold, and includes a big hit (probability change/normal/a sudden change big hit) and The reliability of being a small hit is gold> red> white.

In the effect suggestion display mode, by displaying the character "special", the first special suggestion mode that indicates that it is a subject of advance notice of the special zone effect, and by displaying the character "special?" Displaying the second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is the subject of advance notice, the pseudo-link suggestion mode that indicates that the pseudo-link is executed by displaying the character "NEXT", and the character "SP" The SP suggesting mode suggesting that the super reach is developed. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is foretold, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is foretold. It is a display mode to obtain. The pseudo-relation suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-relation mode is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the super reach is developed.

The special zone effect is an effect in which a special background different from a normal background is displayed by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect has a structure in which the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability with respect to a big hit (probable change/normal/sudden change big hit) or a small hit. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as “rushing into the special zone”.

Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect indicating that it is decided to enter the special zone after suggesting that the special zone is entered (for example, an effect of displaying "success!" after displaying "special zone chance!" ). Also, when the player does not rush into the special zone, a rush failure effect may be executed to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player will enter the special zone. For example, similar to the rush success effect, after indicating that the special zone is to be entered, an effect indicating that the special zone is not to be entered (for example, "Special zone chance!" is displayed, and then "Failure..." is displayed. (Production) can be executed as a rush failure production. Hereinafter, the successful entry effect and the unsuccessful entry effect may be collectively referred to as a “rush announcement effect”.

The rush advance notice effect is an effect that is performed for 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation. When entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the variation time of the variation for executing the rush announcement effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush announcement effect is forcibly ended 1 second before the variation stop. At that time, when the player enters the special zone, the successful player effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

In the second modification, the display mode of displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when the start winning is generated, first, the change mode of the normal display mode (holding change pattern and change timing) is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning. When it is determined to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning, and the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone effect, 5 seconds after re-changing in the pseudo-relation, 5 seconds after starting the super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) When the effect is executed), the display mode is changed to the normal suggestion display mode.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the second modification. First, (1) while the active display 51 and the two hold displays 52 and 53 are being displayed, (2) new hold storage occurs and the hold display 54 corresponding to the hold storage is It is displayed in a special suggestion mode (“special?”). At this time, it is determined to execute the special zone effect in which the pending storage is the subject of advance notice. At this time, it is assumed that the pending change pattern that changes from “white” to “red” and further changes to “gold” is determined, and the first and second change timings are determined.

Then, (3) the variation ends at the gap, and (4) the next variation starts. At this time, the active display 51 corresponding to the new change is displayed and the hold display is shifted. Then, the rush advance notice effect is executed (the image P is displayed). When 3 seconds have passed after that, (5) it is informed that it was a successful entry effect (image P is switched and displayed), and it enters the special zone (image Q is displayed). Five seconds after that, (6) the display mode of the hold display 53 displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to “red”.

After that, although not shown in the figure, the fluctuation ends at a gap and the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed and the hold display is shifted. Then, the display mode of the hold display that was displayed in "red" changes to "gold".

As described above, in the second modification, the specific display unit displays at least the normal display (in this example, “white”) in the specific display (in this example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display. ), a first specific mode (in this example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (in this example, performance suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode)) that suggests the content of the effect. , The second special suggestion manner, the pseudo suggestion manner, the SP suggestion manner)) (in this example, as shown in FIG. 53, “white” or “red”). Or a second special suggestion mode can display the hold display), and effect execution means capable of executing the effect suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (in this example, FIG. 53(5), ( 6), it is possible to execute the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then performs the second specific mode. When the effect indicated by the specific display of the mode is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 53, 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started, the hold display 53 displayed in the second special suggestion mode can be changed to “red”). As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific aspect.

In the second modification, a single display mode (“white” or “red”) is provided as each of the “normal mode” and the “first specific mode”. A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the “first specific modes”. In addition, a plurality of display modes (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-relational suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) are provided as the "second specific mode". ", a single display mode may be provided.

In addition, the effect suggested by the "specific display of the second specific mode" is not limited to the one described above, and a step-up notice effect that develops in stages, a character notice effect in which a character appears, and a dialogue effect that displays a dialogue. Any effect may be used, such as a button effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, or an effect effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display.

Further, in the second modification, the display mode for suggesting the effect by the characters (“special”, “special?”, “NEXT”, “SP”) is the “second specific mode”, but the character, the button, or the pattern is used. May indicate the content of the effect.

Further, in this modification 2, 5 seconds after the special zone effect, the pseudo-relation effect, or the super reach effect is started, "after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display in the second specific mode" is performed. "When the presentation of the content suggested by is executed", but is not limited to this. For example, it may be the time when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed, or the timing before and after the time.

In addition, in the second modification, each effect is started "when the effect indicated by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode". It is decided to unify after 5 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, different timings are set in advance for each suggestive content effect (for example, if the suggestive content effect is pseudo-relation, 3 seconds after the start of pseudo-repetition, if the suggestive content effect is super reach, then super reach is started. 4 seconds later), or any one of a plurality of timings may be determined by lottery. In the case of determination by lottery, it may be different depending on whether or not the lottery ratio is a big hit. Thereby, an expectation can be given by the timing when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

Further, in the second modification, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (that is, data that determines in advance which display mode at which timing) is provided, and the pending change according to any of the data is performed. It may be determined by lottery whether to perform.

Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be determined in advance. May be determined by lottery. Further, the display mode after the change may not be predetermined, and for example, the display mode to be changed may be determined by a lottery at the change timing.

Further, in the second modification, the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are determined by different lottery as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display mode change patterns including a normal display mode and a display suggestion display mode may be provided, and which change pattern is used to change the display mode may be determined.

In Modification 2, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, it is not displayed in the normal display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the hold display or active display in the normal display mode is displayed as an image having a lower display priority than the hold display or active display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode or Even while the active display is being displayed, the same display as in the second modification can be performed without interrupting the display control of the normal display mode (the change control of the display mode at the change timing).

Further, in the second modification, the performance executing means may not execute the performance of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, Even when the special zone effect is not executed, the hold display or the active display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode, that is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. In some cases, the special display effect, which is the suggested content, is not executed.), even if the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is not executed, the specific display means is in the second specific aspect. It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display displayed as the first specific mode (for example, the special zone effect is not executed although the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode). At any time, it may be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). Accordingly, it is possible to maintain an expectation when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed.

Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher expectation than the second specific mode (for example, a big hit or a smaller hit than the second special suggestive mode). The hold display or the active display can be displayed in “red”, which has a high degree of reliability with respect to winning. Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher expectation than the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (for example, The hold display or the active display can be displayed in "red", which has a higher degree of reliability with respect to a big hit or a small hit than the special zone effect). Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is produced. It is possible to change from the suggestion display mode to “red” and further to “gold”. As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the display mode of the specific display after the change to the first specific mode.

Further, in this modified example 2, the specific display means has a plurality of types of second specific modes having different suggested contents (in this example, the first special suggestive mode, the second special suggestive mode, the pseudo continuous suggestive mode, and the SP suggestive mode). The specific display can be displayed in, and the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at a different rate based on the type of the second specific mode (for example, "red" is included). The ratio of which presentation suggestion display mode is displayed when the hold change pattern (other than P01) is set to "Red" at different rates depending on the type of production suggestion display mode. It's okay.) Thereby, the display mode of the specific display can be paid attention to.

In the second modification, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous production is always executed with the corresponding change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous production is not limited thereto. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, there may be provided a case of executing the pseudo continuous effect and a case of not executing the pseudo continuous effect. Similarly, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, there may be provided a case of executing the super reach effect and a case of not executing the super reach effect.

It should be noted that this modification 2 has a configuration in which it is possible to recognize (pre-read) that the variation is accompanied by one or two pseudo-links based on the variation category command received at the time of winning the start prize. Alternatively, the pseudo-relationship suggesting mode can be executed with the change involving the pseudo-repeating being performed twice as the notice target, but the pseudo-repeating suggestion mode may be executed even if the change involving the pseudo-repeating is performed as the noticeable object. ..

Further, as the change mode in the pending change pattern, not only the normal display mode but also the effect suggestion display mode is included, and it is possible to collectively determine the change modes to the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode. Good. For example, a pending change pattern that changes from “white” to the first special suggestion display mode, a pending change pattern that changes from the second special suggestion display mode to “red”, or a change from “white” to the pseudo-relational suggestion mode, Further, a plurality of pending change patterns such as a pending change pattern that changes to “red” and a pending change pattern that changes from “white” to the SP suggestion display mode are provided, and which of the pending change patterns is selected is selected. It may be that.

Further, it is possible to determine the pending change pattern by using a common pending change pattern determination table regardless of the winning determination result, or a plurality of pending change pattern determination tables are provided and received. The pending change pattern may be determined using the pending change pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category command.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second modification, it is determined at the start winning that a variation involving pseudo-repetition including a plurality of re-variations is determined at the time of winning the start prize, and it is determined to display the hold display in the pseudo-repetitive suggestion mode. In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-variation timing the pseudo-link suggestion mode is changed to the normal display mode (for example, “red” or “gold”). For example, when it is decided to change the display mode at the first re-variation timing, execution of the pseudo-relation including one re-variation will be suggested by the pseudo-relation suggestion mode, while the second re-variation timing is suggested. When it is determined that the display mode is changed at the change timing, the execution of the pseudo-run including the second re-change is suggested by the pseudo-link suggesting mode. That is, when it is determined at the time of starting winning that the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-repetition including a plurality of re-variations and it is determined to display the hold display in the pseudo-repetition suggestion mode, the pseudo-repetition including a single re-variation is performed. It may be possible to determine whether the execution of the run is the suggestion target or the execution of the pseudo run including two re-variations is the suggestion target.

In addition, a plurality of display modes are provided as the pseudo-relational suggestion mode, and the number of re-changes may be suggested depending on which type of the pseudo-relational suggestion mode the pending display is displayed. For example, in the case where the pseudo-link suggestion modes A to C are provided and the pseudo-link performs one re-variation, the pending display is easily displayed in the pseudo-link suggestion mode A and the re-variation is performed twice. In the case of pseudo-link, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggestion mode B, and in the pseudo-link suggestion mode C in which three re-variations are performed, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggestion mode C. Good.

Further, in the second modification, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the change is started, but the start timing (rush timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at the timing of starting the variation or at a predetermined timing during execution of a predetermined effect (for example, super reach effect). In addition, if it is a variation involving pseudo-relation, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-variation timing or the second re-variation timing. Further, at which timing of the plurality of timings the special zone effect is started may be determined by lottery.

In addition, a game machine that can be executed by combining arbitrary controls of the controls in the game machine shown in the above-described embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2 may be used.

In addition, the specific display of the second specific aspect is accompanied by an operation, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is different at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific aspect when the suggestive effect is executed. As the effect is executed (for example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode is different depending on the display position of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode when the change effect is executed) Good. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

In addition, the specific display of the second specific aspect involves an action, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is changed at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific aspect before the suggestive effect is executed. As the effect is executed (for example, the execution rate of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode is different depending on the operation frequency of the specific display in the second special suggestion mode before the change effect is executed) Good. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, 1 is set when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation and whether or not there is a sliding effect (before the reach, it is so-called. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery production, etc. after the reach (if the reach does not occur, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time of 2 stop) or the fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific change mode executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only the ratio being different due to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. It is a concept that also includes a relationship such that A:B=100%:0% and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is such a mode. I can't stop. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed as a derivative, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be one.

In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine (so-called first type gaming machine) that shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol has been described, but the variable provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a gaming ball has won (V winning) a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball device (so-called accessory) , And may be applied to a gaming machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state based on the type of big hit that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the special winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the big hit, the state changes to the probability change state, while the particular area is played during the big hit. May be a state in which a normal state is entered when the vehicle does not pass. In that case, by changing the easiness of passing the game ball to the specific area depending on the type of big hit, a substantial probability big hit and non-certain probability big hit may be realized. For example, the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the special winning opening depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit type with a long opening time of the special winning opening is a big hit (substantial probability variation big hit) where the game balls easily pass to the specific area, and the big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening It may be a big hit (substantially uncertain variation big hit) in which a ball is hard to pass.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not it is a big hit and the winning pattern determination (prefetch determination) of the variation pattern type, and a command (symbol designating command) indicating the determination result of the winning pattern. , The variable category command) and the pre-reading notice effect is executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the command indicating the winning determination result, but not limited to such a mode, for example, Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (prefetch determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a command that specifies only the values of the big hit determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted when the start winning is generated. Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (prefetch determination) based on the value of the random number designated by those commands.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuits for controlling the effect device are mounted. You may mount on one board. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a lamp, an LED, a speaker 27, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as two effect control boards.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another board (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc., or the sound/lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. You may make it transmit a control command, and may be made to be transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for effect control in the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply be passed on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. According to what is done, control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 for controlling the effect display device 9 is executed. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment, similarly to the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the substrate 35 or the sound/lamp substrate.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is configured such that a plurality of types of coins are inserted and a predetermined bet number is set and a player operates an operation lever. When a symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button and the combination of the symbols is a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a game medium is used as the game machine has been taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as, and gives a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probability variation big hit and normal big hit as the big hit type, and based on the fact that it was decided as the probability variation big hit as the big hit type, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game has been shown. , But is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in the probable variation state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in each of the later-described examples may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description, but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, in addition, a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, a rendering device capable of performing rendering (for example, rendering accessory 90201) and an operable movable body (for example, , Push button 90120) and a specific device (for example, a microcomputer for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5)) near the movable body using the effect device. 90100 in which the step S908120 is executed), a movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion in the production control microcomputer 90100 where step S908111 is executed), and a mode involving an operation (for example, an advance position or a retreat). A specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a change in execution) in a mode in which the display position is switched to a position, a mode in which the expressionless display mode is switched to a display mode in which eyes are opened to sweat and tears are displayed. It is possible to display the corresponding active display and the pending display corresponding to the fluctuation that has not started yet, and the display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). Shape, pattern, position, range to be displayed. And the like) can be changed. For example, the active display is displayed by performing steps S663B and S667B in the effect control microcomputer 100, and the hold display is performed by performing steps S3911 and S3929. Is displayed and a step of changing the display mode of the specific display by performing step S4713) and a suggestive effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display (for example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)). ) Can be executed (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, a change effect is set in step S4506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S8004, and steps S8006 and S8105 are performed. And the movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific production is executed (for example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3)). After that, the specific display shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed), and the specific display means performs an operation mode of the specific display when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, display position (advance position, retreat position). Operation frequency ( The specific display may be performed at different rates depending on other operation modes such as high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward). (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4707 to S4709 so that the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position). Changes the display mode of the specific display at a rate of 100%, but does not change the display mode of the specific display when the display position of the specific display as the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position (0% The display mode of the specific display is changed according to the ratio))).

According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. Moreover, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

Further, in the above gaming machine, a specific display or suggestive effect may be executable near the movable body. Furthermore, the movable body may be operable when changing the display mode of the specific display or when the suggestive effect is executed. Further, the movable body may be operable according to the operation mode of the specific display. According to such a configuration, by moving the movable body, the attention can be paid to the specific display and the suggestive effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Further, as effects that can be executed in the vicinity of the movable body, a plurality of effects such as a specific effect, a specific display, and a suggestive effect may be provided, or only the specific display may be performed or only the suggestive effect may be executable. ..

Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of improving the effect of the specific effect, a game machine capable of playing a game, and an effect device (for example, effect accessory 90201) capable of executing the effect, , An operable movable body (for example, a push button 90120), and a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5)) in the vicinity of the movable object using the effect device. (For example, a part for executing step S908120 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) and a movable body control means for operating a movable body (for example, a part for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) are movable. The body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed. Yes) game machines. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

Other Embodiments 1.
Hereinafter, a first other embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 902 that is openably and closably provided in the game frame. The game frame is a front frame (not shown) that is installed so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (games to be described later). (Excluding the board 906).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. Below the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

A member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 904 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the upper side of the lower tray body (for example, a central portion of the lower tray), for example, and is formed by a player. The stick controller 90122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 90122 has a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) and a predetermined operation finger when the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 90121 (see FIG. 58) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90125 (FIG. 58) for detecting a predetermined instructing operation such as push-pull operation on the trigger button 90121 is provided inside the operating rod of the stick controller 90122. (See 58). Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 58) for detecting a tilt operation with respect to the operation rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIGS. 54 and 58) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

The member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 903 is, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 90122) or the like, and the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation performed by the player. A push sensor 90361 (see FIG. 58) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 54, the push buttons 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are attached at upper and lower positions in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be attached to either the left side or the right side of the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not have a vertical positional relationship but may have a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there is an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area that variably displays the effect symbols for three decorations (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the symbol is displayed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display device 908b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. ..

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continued for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbols (for example, the symbols in the left, middle, and right are arranged in the same symbol). The combination of symbols) is stopped, oscillating, enlarged or reduced, or deformed in a state of being in agreement, or a plurality of symbols fluctuates in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are exchanged. Then, an effect performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not the big hit symbol, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later are provided. In this other embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol to be described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c and the second special symbol for the first special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing to turn on and off the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d in a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start time and the end time of the variable display are the same and the variable display period is the same.

On the right side of the effect display device 909, a first special symbol display device (first variable display portion) 908a that variably displays the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this other embodiment, the first special symbol display device 908a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display the numbers (or symbols) 0-9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 909 (on the right side of the first special symbol display device 908a), a second special symbol display device (second variable display portion) 908b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display device 908b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 908b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in, for example, a rectangular shape. In addition, in this other embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b may each be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). There is something to do.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where two special symbol display devices 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening). After passing 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening and a gate, and the concept includes that the gaming ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 9014 (it becomes easier to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning opening 9014 than in the first starting winning opening 9013. Also, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it is easier to win the game ball in the first starting winning port 9013 than in the second starting winning port 9014. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win).

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely easy to win in the second start winning port 9014. Although the first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, the interval between the lower end of the effect displaying device 909 and the first start winning opening 9013 can be further reduced, or the first start winning opening 9013 can be obtained. The nails are densely arranged around 9013, or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 9013 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 9014 is Alternatively, the winning rate of the first start winning port 9013 may be set higher.

Above the second special symbol display device 908b, a second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning port 9014, that is, the second reserved memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b increases the number of display units to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding storage is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning storage. ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a consisting of four displays. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 9018a increases the number of the indicator which lights up whenever there is an effective starting winning a prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 908a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

Further, the display screen of the effect display device 909 is provided with a first holding storage display unit 909a that displays the first holding storage number and a second holding storage display unit 909b that displays the second holding storage number. .. In addition, you may comprise so that the total holding storage display part which displays the total number (total holding storage number) which is the sum total of the 1st holding storage number and the 2nd holding storage number may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

Effect display device 909, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a, and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b, for decoration (for production) Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b, a production symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 909. The combination of is displayed stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a special winning opening is provided on the right side of the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 908b. When the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 9021 to be in an open state in a specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the special winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided on the right side of the game area 907, so in the jackpot gaming state, the player places the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 9020. In order to win the prize, a shooting operation (so-called right hitting) is performed aiming at the right side of the game area 907. It should be noted that the gate 9032 and the variable winning ball device 9015 may be provided on the right side of the game area 907 so that the right hitting operation is performed even when the game state is a time saving state or a high base state. Good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, below the variable winning ball device 9015, a performance effect product 90201 imitating a face of a character or the like is provided. A character LED 90202 is provided in a portion of the effect character 90201 imitating the eyes of a face such as a character, and a predetermined effect can be performed by lighting and displaying the character LED 90202 of the effect character 90201. Has been done. In addition, in this other embodiment, the accessory LED 90202 is configured by a full-color LED, and can emit light in various lighting colors such as white and red, and sequentially change the lighting color to emit light. By doing so, it is possible to emit light by rainbow display (rainbow display).

On the left side of the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display device 9010 that variably displays normal symbols is provided. In this other embodiment, the normal symbol display device 9010 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example. Further, the normal symbol display device 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, and for example, a display device that can display a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp that can alternately display “○” and “x”). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display on the normal symbol display device 9010 is started. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7".), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state where the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 9014) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display device 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 increases the LED to be turned on by 1. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1. Furthermore, the probability change state that is more likely to be decided to be a big hit than the normal state (compared to the normal state, the probability of being judged as a big hit as a variation display result of special symbols is increased) Then, the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased. Further, even in a time-saving state (a gaming state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) in which the variation time of the symbol is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing a sound effect and a sound as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

The game machine drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a ball operation handle 905, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into a game area 907 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then comes down the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 1 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 908b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this other embodiment, in the case of a probability variation big hit, the game state shifts to a high-probability state (probability variation state), and the game balls easily start winning (that is, special symbol display devices 908a, 908b). And a transition to a high base state which is a game state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display in the effect display device 909 is easily established (in this other embodiment, it shifts to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state, it is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 being in the open state is increased, or the time when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is longer than in the case of not being in the high base state. It will be easier to win the starting prize.

Note that the variable winning ball device 9015 does not extend the time for which it is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), but shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a winning symbol is increased. Therefore, the high base state may be set. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 being in the open state is increased. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which it is easy to start winning. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probability variation symbol, and the like, and it is from a disadvantageous state for the player. It changes to an advantageous state (state in which it is easy to start winning). In addition, increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Also, by shifting to a normal symbol time saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the regular symbol display 9010 is shortened, the high base state may be shifted. In the normal symbol time saving state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of the variation of the normal symbol is increased, and as a result, the frequency of winning the normal symbol is increased. Therefore, as the frequency of winning the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 becomes high, and the starting winning easily occurs (high base state).

Also, by changing to a time saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and effect symbols is shortened, the variation time of special symbols and effect symbols is shortened, so the variation of special symbols and effect symbols starts. It is possible to reduce a situation in which an invalid starting winning occurs due to a high frequency of playing (in other words, the holding memory is quickly consumed). Therefore, an effective starting winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (transfer to high base state) May be. Also, by shifting to any one of the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (high base State). Further, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it is easy to start winning (high. It is also possible to set).

Next, the internal structure of the push button 90120 will be described. 55 and 56 are exploded perspective views for explaining the internal structure of the push button 90120. As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, a holding member 90302 that holds the vibrated member 90303 is provided inside the transparent cover 90301 of the push button 90120. In this other embodiment, one holding member 90302 holds all the vibrated members 90303. A plurality of (13) arrangement holes 90325 for arranging the respective vibrated members 90303 are penetrated through the holding member 90302. Further, the vibrated member 90303 and the arrangement hole 90325 have a one-to-one correspondence, and the arrangement hole 90325 has a regular hexagonal shape in plan view corresponding to the shape of the vibrated member 90303. Further, the vibrated member 90303 is inserted into the arrangement hole 90325 from below. On the outer peripheral surface of the lower end portion of the vibrated member 90303, a protruding edge portion (not shown) is provided so as to prevent it from coming off from the arrangement hole 90325. Since the protruding edge portion is provided so as to project, the diameter dimension of the lower end portion of the vibrated member 90303 is larger than the opening dimension of the arrangement hole 90325.

Further, in the vicinity of the arrangement hole 90325 in the holding member 90302, the same shape as the vibrating member 90303 is formed and formed in a regular hexagonal shape in plan view, and it is visually recognized that the vibrating member 90303 vibrates. An auxiliary visual recognition portion 90326 is formed to make it easier. The auxiliary visual recognition portion 90326 is a portion integrally formed with the holding member 90302, and is provided in a plurality of places of the holding member 90302, particularly around the arrangement hole 90325. It is not necessary that all the auxiliary visual recognition portions 90326 have the same shape as the vibrating member 90303, and the auxiliary visual recognition portions 90326 formed at the corners of the holding member 90302 have a shape in which a part thereof is cut out, that is, one. The part has the same shape as a part of the vibrated member 90303 (a shape in which a part of a regular hexagon is cut out).

In addition, in the other embodiment, by driving the vibrator motor 90126 provided in the stick controller 90122, the stick controller 90122 can be vibrated, and the push controller 90122 is integrally configured with the push unit. The button 90120 can also be vibrated, and thus the vibrated member 90303 can also be vibrated. When the push button 90120 is vibrating, the vibrated member 90303 vibrates with a large amplitude, but the auxiliary visual recognition portion 90326 integrated with the holding member 90302 vibrates with a smaller amplitude than the vibrated member 90303. The vibration of the vibrated member 90303 is emphasized and visually recognized due to the difference in (amplitude).

In addition, in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the vibrated member 90303 is shown as a halftone dot to facilitate understanding, but the color of the vibrated member 90303 and the color of the auxiliary visual recognition portion 90326 are the same. .. That is, in a state where the vibrated member 90303 is not vibrating, it is difficult to distinguish the vibrated member 90303 and the auxiliary visual recognition portion 90326, and it is difficult to know which part vibrates. .. Therefore, when the member to be vibrated 90303 starts to vibrate, unexpectedness occurs and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

A vibrating lens member 90304 for transmitting vibration to each of the vibrated members 90303 is provided below the vibrated members 90303. In the other embodiment, one vibrating lens member 90304 having a plate shape is provided, and the vibration applied to the vibrating lens member 90304 is transmitted to each vibrated member 90303. The inside of the vibrated member 90303 has a hollow shape, and has a swing shaft projecting downward in the center thereof. A plurality of bottomed hole portions 90335 in which the lower ends of the swing shafts of the vibrated members 90303 are arranged are provided on the upper surface side of the vibrating lens member 90304. Further, the vibrated member 90303 is swingably provided around the lower end of the swing shaft.

Further, among the plurality of bottomed hole portions 90335 formed in the vibrating lens member 90304, some bottomed hole portions 90335 are formed in the convex portion 90336 projecting upward from the vibrating lens member 90304. The protruding lengths of the respective convex portions 90336 are different from each other. That is, when the height position of the bottom surface portion of each bottomed hole portion 90335 is different, when the vibrated member 90303 is swung about the lower end of the swing shaft that contacts the bottom surface of the bottomed hole portion 90335. In addition, the vibrating modes of the respective vibrated members 90303 are different (swing randomly). In the other embodiment, in the vibrating lens member 90304, the bottomed hole portion 90335 provided on the center side of the push button 90120 has a high height position, and the bottomed hole portion provided on the peripheral side of the push button 90120 is high. The height position of the portion 90335 is low. The height position of each vibrated member 90303 differs depending on the difference in height position of the bottomed hole portion 90335.

As shown in FIG. 55, a plate-shaped button base member 90305 is provided below the vibrating lens member 90304. The holding member 90302 holding the vibrated member 90303 is connected to the button base member 90305 with the vibrating lens member 90304 accommodated inside. The vibrating lens member 90304 is mounted on the upper surface side of the button base member 90305, and the vibrating lens member 90304 is vibratably provided with respect to the button base member 90305. Further, on the peripheral edge of the button base member 90305, an engaged portion 90343 with which the engaging convex portion 90327 provided on the peripheral edge of the holding member 90302 is engaged is provided. Further, the transparent cover 90301 is connected to the button base member 90305 from above. On the peripheral edge of the button base member 90305, an engaging convex portion 90345 that engages with an engaged concave portion 90323 provided on the peripheral edge of the transparent cover 90301 is provided.

In the other embodiment, the holding member 90302, the vibrated member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 are made of a material having a light-transmitting property, and as will be described later, for the purpose of irradiation from below. The light of the button LED 90360 can be transmitted. The vibrating member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 need not be completely transparent, and may be an opaque member such as frosted glass as long as it has a light-transmitting property. It may be a colored member.

The transparent cover 90301 described above is configured as a completely transparent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the vibration mode of the vibrated member 90303 is visible (recognizable). Alternatively, the transparent cover 90301 may be an opaque member such as frosted glass or a colored member.

As shown in FIG. 56, a plate-shaped base member 90306 is provided below the button base member 90305. A coil spring 90355 is provided at the center of the base member 90306 as a biasing means for biasing the button base member 90305 in one direction (upward). One end of this coil spring 90355 is arranged in a spring arrangement portion 90354 formed in the center of the upper surface of the base member 90306, and the other end of the coil spring 90355 is formed in the center of the lower surface of the button base member 90305. It is attached to the mounting protrusion. The coil spring 90355 has an urging force in the extending direction, and the coil spring 90355 applies an urging force to the button base member 90305 so as to move it upward.

Further, an engaging claw 90344 that is inserted into the mounting hole 90353 of the base member 90306 is provided so as to protrude downward near the peripheral edge on the lower surface side of the button base member 90305. By loosely fitting the engaging claw 90344 into the mounting hole 90353, the button base member 90305 is attached to the base member 90306 in a vertically movable state with respect to the base member 90306. Further, the lower end of the engaging claw 90344 has a hook shape so that the engaging claw 90344 does not come out upward from the mounting hole 90353. That is, even if the button base member 90305 is lifted by the biasing force of the coil spring 90355, the movement range of the button base member 90305 is regulated by the engagement claw 90344.

Further, on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent cover 90301, there is provided a convex strip 90321 formed so as to surround the outer peripheral edge and projecting in the horizontal direction. Further, a convex piece 90322 is provided on the front end of the transparent cover 90301. The ridge 90321 of the transparent cover 90301 is hooked on the hooked ridge provided on the inner peripheral edge of the button placement portion 90308, and the projection 90902 of the transparent cover 90301 is provided on the front end of the button placement portion 90308. When the button base member 90305 is lifted by being hooked by the hooked portion, the moving range of the button base member 90305 is restricted.

In this other embodiment, when the player presses the push button 90120, the transparent cover 90301, the holding member 90302, the vibrated member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 are integrated. , Is moved downward against the biasing force of the coil spring 90355. In the other embodiment, the transparent cover 90301, the holding member 90302, the vibrating member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 constitute a moving portion that is movably supported by the base member 90306. ..

In addition, the push button 90120 is placed in the inner placement space 90370 of the button placement unit 90308. A screw fixing hole 90312, through which a screw for fixing the base member 90306 is inserted, is provided in the upper portion of the operation rod 90309 (the root portion of the button placement portion 90308). The screw fixing holes 90312 are provided at two places on the left and right. Further, female screw portions 90356 are provided at two left and right positions near one end of the base member 90306 (in the other embodiments, near the front end). The base member 90306 is fixed to the operating rod 90309 by screwing the screw inserted into the screw fixing hole 90312 into the female screw portion 90356. When the vibrator motor 90126 is driven and the operating rod 90309 is vibrated, the vibration is transmitted to the base member 90306 via the screw inserted in the screw fixing hole 90312, and is provided above the base member 90306. The push button 90120 (moving part) vibrates.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, a button board 90307 is provided below the base member 90306. A button LED 90360 for effect is mounted on the button board 90307. A plurality of button LEDs 90360 are provided on the button substrate 90307 (seven in the other embodiments), and the base member 90306 has a window portion in which the button LEDs 90360 are arranged at positions corresponding to the button LEDs 90360. 90351 is opened. Then, when the button LED 90360 is turned on, light is incident from the lower surface of the button base member 90305, and the light refracted and diffused by the light diffusing portion of the vibrating lens member 90304 reaches the holding member 90302 and the vibrated member 90303. It is incident from below. Therefore, when the push button 90120 is viewed from the player's point of view, it seems that the holding member 90302 and the vibrated member 90303 are emitting light.

Further, a push sensor 90361 (photosensor) for detecting whether or not the push operation performed on the push button 90120 is performed is mounted on the button substrate 90307. Further, a window portion 90352 in which the push sensor 90361 is arranged is opened in the base member 90306 at a position corresponding to the push sensor 90361. The push sensor 90361 is exposed to the upper surface side of the base member 90306 through the window 90352.

FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 57 also shows the payout control board 9037, the effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit 9057. including. In another embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer has at least the RAM 9055 in addition to the CPU 9056, and the ROM 9054 may be external or internal. The I/O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 90503 for generating a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In addition, in the other embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up by power supply.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054, and hence the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 9031.

The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generating function that the numerical data to be read becomes a random number value.

In addition, an input driver circuit 9058 for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 9032a, the first starting opening switch 9013a, the second starting opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game controlling microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. Also, the output circuit 9059 for driving the solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game controlling microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560, the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b that variably displays the special symbol, the normal symbol display device 9010 that variably displays the normal symbol, the first special symbol reservation storage Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 is performed.

An information output circuit 9064 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031.

In this other embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 outputs effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The effect control command to instruct is received, and the display control of the effect display device 909 that variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080, via the lamp driver board 9035, the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side, the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201, and the push button. The display control of the button LED 90360 provided in 90120 is performed, and the sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the audio output board 9070.

As will be described later, the effect control unit is also connected to a trigger sensor 90125 included in the stick controller 90122, a tilt direction sensor unit 90123, a vibrator motor 90126, and a push sensor 90361 included in the push button 90120. (See FIG. 58), but illustration is omitted in FIG. 57.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90101 and an effect control microcomputer 90100 including a RAM for storing information on effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be external. In the other embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up by power supply. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

In the other embodiment, a VDP 90109 that cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, people, characters, figures and symbols (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for this. The VDP 90109 reads the image data from the CGROM according to the instruction from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 in the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

As a signal direction restricting means that allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass through the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. A diode is illustrated in FIG. 58. Further, the unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I/O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the side of the relay substrate 9077).

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the trigger button 90121 of the stick controller 90122, from the trigger sensor 90125 via the input port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 90120 has been detected, from the push sensor 90361 via the input port 90106. In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the player on the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 via the input port 90106. .. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the stick controller 90122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port 90105.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Also, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

In the lamp driver board 9035, a signal for driving an LED is input to the LED driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED driver 90352 supplies a current to light-emitting bodies such as the frame LED 9028, the accessory LED 90202, and the button LED 90360 based on a signal for driving the LED.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level according to the volume set in the volume 90706 and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined performance period (for example, the fluctuation period of the performance symbol) in time series.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) After executing a security check process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S904), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S905). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode showing an interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S906). If the CPU 9056 detects ON in the confirmation, it executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether the backup RAM area data protection process (eg, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) has been performed when the power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. Yes (step S907). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In this other embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 causes the game state recovery process (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply was stopped. Processing). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processes of steps S9041 and S9042, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden variation big hit, small hit, or off) to the effect control board 9080 (step. S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In step S9044, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 63) when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may do so. In this case, the production control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the value of the variable time timer described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the variable time timer that has been saved is restarted, and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been used has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this other embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process process is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the special symbol process flag that is saved.

It should be noted that the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of necessarily transmitting the display result designation command when the power is restored. .. If the value of the variable time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the display state designation command is not transmitted and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that there is a power outage during fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates during a power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command has not been received, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

In addition, in this other embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 9055. Also, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Initially set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The value is set.

The CPU 9056 also initializes a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted) for initialization (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed initialization processing). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 performs a screen display for informing that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90503 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 sets the random number circuit 90503 to update the value of the random R′, for example, by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this other embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S9017) and the initial value random number updating process (step S9018) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. The setting is made (step S9019). In this other embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is not made, or a random number for determining whether or not the reach is made when the big hit is not made. The display random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this other embodiment, the initial value random number, the initial count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process to do, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol per determination random number is one round (normal symbol per determination random number If the number of steps between the minimum and maximum possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to that counter.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power interruption detection process is executed to detect whether a power interruption signal is output (whether it is in an ON state) (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and the state determination thereof is performed (switch process: step S9021). ).

Next, the CPU 9056 is the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the normal symbol display 9010, the first special symbol reserved storage display 9018a, the second special symbol reserved storage display 9018b, the normal symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). Regarding the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the normal symbol display device 9010, a drive signal is output to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol per determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are executed in accordance with the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. CPU9056, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated according to the gaming state.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (production control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

The CPU 9056 also executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, in accordance with the winning detection based on that any of the first starting opening switch 9013a, the second starting opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 is turned on, a payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 9037. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of award balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In addition, in this other embodiment, for example, a game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, and the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9013a or the second starting opening switch 9014a is transmitted. If entered, three prize balls will be paid out. In addition, for example, when a game ball wins the special winning opening and a detection signal is input from the count switch 9023, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Although the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided in the other embodiment, the CPU 9056 turns on/off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content regarding turning off is output to the output port (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). CPU9056, for example, until the end flag is set when the start flag for the variation of the normal symbol is set, the variation speed of the normal symbol switches the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs the drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

By the above control, in this other embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Also, in this other embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is It may be executed in the main process.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later) (for big hit type determination)
(2) Random 2'(MR2'): Determines the type (type) of variation pattern (for determination of variation pattern type)
(3) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4'(MR4'): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining random 4'initial value)

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 60, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating the random number for jackpot type determination (1) and the random number for normal symbol determination (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are the determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random numbers (random 2′, random 3′) or the initial value random numbers (random 5′). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the game effect. Further, in this other embodiment, a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 90560 (which may be hardware external to the game control microcomputer 90560) is used as the big hit determination random number. .. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of a hardware random number.

FIG. 62(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a time-shortened state (that is, a gaming state that is not the guaranteed variation state) and a probability variation time jackpot determination table used in the guaranteed variation state. In the normal time jackpot determination table, the numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 62(A) are set, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 62(A). Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 62(A) is a jackpot determination value.

62(B) and 62(C) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The small hit determination table, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol There is (for the second special symbol). In the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), each numerical value described in FIG. 62(B) is set, and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), FIG. 62(C). Each listed numerical value is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 62B and 62C are small hit determination values.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit judging random number (random R′). The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. When it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is determined to be a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 62(B) and (C), it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 62(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIGS. 62(B) and (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, determining whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to a big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to move to the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

In addition, in this other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) and (C), when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, a small hit occurs at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this other embodiment, when the start prize is given to the first start winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the start prize is given to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the second special prize is given. Compared to the case where the variable display of the symbols is executed, the percentage determined as "small hit" is high.

62D and 62E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. Of these, FIG. 62(D) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a in the case. In addition, FIG. 62(E) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1') for jackpot type determination, It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the "probability variation jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot". In addition, in this other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62D and 62E, five determination values are assigned to the “suddenly probable variation big hit” in the big hit type judgment table 90131a ( While it is determined to be a sudden probability big hit at a rate of 5/40, one determination value is assigned to “a sudden probability big hit” in the big hit type determination table 90131b (1/40). It is determined that the sudden change jackpot in proportion of)) Explain the case. Therefore, in this other embodiment, when the start prize is given to the first start winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the start prize is given to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the second special prize is given. Compared with the case where the variable display of the symbols is executed, the rate of being determined as "a sudden sudden change big hit" is high. In addition, "sudden probability big hit" is distributed only to the big hit type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden positive big hit" is not distributed to the big jack type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol (that is, , The first special symbol may be changed and displayed, and it may be determined as "a sudden probability big hit".

In this other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62D and 62E, the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probably odd big hit”, and “suddenly sudden big hit”. In addition, in this other embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is other than this. It is not limited to the one shown in the form. For example, a 10R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a 10-round jackpot game, a 7R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a seven-round jackpot game, or a 5R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In addition, in other embodiments, the big hit types are three types of “normal big hit”, “probability variation big hit” and “sudden probability variation big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four types. The above jackpot types may be provided. In addition, conversely, there may be less than three types of big hits, for example, only two types of big hits may be provided.

The "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and is shifted to only a time saving state after the end of the big hit game state (see step S90167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (100 times in other embodiments), the time saving state ends (see steps S90168, S90137 to S90140). Even before the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is finished even when the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

The "probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this other embodiment, the jackpot is shifted to the probability variation state and the time saving state). (See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). Then, the probability variation state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

In addition, the "sudden probability big hit" is the number of times that the special winning opening is opened less than "normal big hit" or "probability big hit" (in other embodiments, the opening is 0.1 second twice). It is a jackpot that can be tolerated. That is, in the case of "a sudden sudden change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal big hit" and "probable odds big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in "sudden positive big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it is hardly expected that a game ball will win the big winning opening during a big hit game. And in this other embodiment, the sudden change jackpot gaming state is transitioned to the certainty variation state after completion of the sudden variation jackpot gaming state (in this other embodiment, the certainty variation state is also shifted to the time saving state. Refer to steps S90169 and S90170). Then, the probability variation state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

It should be noted that the mode of sudden probability big hit is not limited to that shown in the other embodiments. For example, the number of times of opening the special winning opening may be set to 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as in the case of a normal big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, and only the opening time of the special winning opening may be made as short as 0.1 seconds.

In addition, in this other embodiment, even when a "small hit" occurs, the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as the big hit game state by the "abrupt probability sudden big hit" is performed. Is done. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change after the opening of the special winning opening twice, and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden variation big hit" or a "small hit", and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, when it is configured such that the types of big hits are all probability varying big hits, the small hits may not be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probability change big hits, if a small hit is provided, the sudden change big hit without a time-saving state (high base state) but only a change to the probability change state (high probability state). It is preferable to provide (the opening pattern of the special winning opening is the same in the case of the sudden variation big hit and the case of small hit).

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b have numerical values that are compared with the value of the random 1', and the determination values (the jackpot type determination that correspond to each of the "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden confirmation variation jackpot". Value) is set. When the value of Random 1′ matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the type of the jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

63 and 64 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the command 80XX(H) is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 909 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX(H), it controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of effect symbols.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H), the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command 8F00 (H) is a production control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. The game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and otherwise, initialization designation Send a command.

The command 9F00(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 and A002 (H) are display control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this other embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit/sudden probability big hit start designation command is used depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, a big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", and a small hit if it is "a sudden probability variation big hit" or "small hit". / The sudden probability big hit start designation command (A002(H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90560 may be configured to send a fanfare designating command for suddenly changing a sudden big hit to specify a fanfare designating command in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designating command in the case of a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX(H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) indicating a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX.

Command A301 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the jackpot game based on the "normal jackpot" or the "probably odd jackpot" is finished. The command A302(H) is a production control command (small hit/sudden odd change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the game of small hit or the sudden sudden change big hit. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 90560 is configured so as to transmit an ending designating command for designating abrupt variation big hit end when it is a sudden variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

The command A400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening has been detected.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (probability variation state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the probability variation state. Command B002 (H) is a production control command (time saving state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the time saving state.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designating command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number addition specification command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has increased by 1. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by 1. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has decreased by 1.

In addition, in this other embodiment, as the holding information capable of specifying the holding storage number, a first holding storage number addition designation command, a second holding storage number addition designation command, a first holding storage number subtraction designation command, and a Although the case where the 2 reserved storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the hold information, a production control command (first reserve storage number designation command) that specifies the first reserve storage number itself, or a production control command (second reserve storage number designation command) that specifies the second reserve storage number itself. May be configured to be transmitted. In addition, for example, as the hold information, an effect control command (total reserved storage number designation command) that specifies the total number (total reserved storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is transmitted. You may comprise. In this case, when it is configured to transmit the total reserved memory number designation information, for example, an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that the first start prize has been received, or a second start prize. By transmitting an effect control command (second start winning award designation command) that specifies that there has been, it is possible to specify which of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number has increased. Good.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control micro computer 90560 installed on the main board 9031. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the display state of the effect display device 909 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. To do.

65 and 66 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 9056, if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is on, that is, the start to the first starting winning opening 9013 If a winning has occurred, a first starting opening switch passage process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). Further, the CPU 9056, if the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 has occurred. Then, the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first starting port switch 9013a or the second starting port switch 9014a is not turned on, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S903O to S90310 are the following processes.

Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved storages) stored in the reserved storage buffer. The number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, control is performed to send a variation pattern command according to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and a variation time timer that measures the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

Special symbol fluctuation process (step S90303): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the symbol. The control for transmitting the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Special symbol stop process (step S90304): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. Further, when the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In addition, in this other embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, a special symbol for stopping the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The display control data is set in the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 76), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control process of step S9022. ..

Special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S90305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control to transmit the special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S90306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The special winning opening opening preprocessing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the special winning opening opening preprocessing is also processing for starting a big hit game. In addition, the special winning opening opening specifying command is transmitted for each round with a value designating the round set in the EXT data, and thus a different special winning opening opening specifying command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Transmits a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10.

Special winning opening opening process (step S90306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the special winning opening, a process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. Moreover, while performing control to transmit the designation command after opening during the big hit to the production control microcomputer 90100, when all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this In the example, update to 7).

Big hit end processing (step S90307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability variation flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

Small hit opening pre-processing (step S90308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90309. The small hit opening pre-processing is executed each time the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hitting open process (step S90309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. The processing etc. which confirms establishment of the closing conditions of the special winning opening are performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied, and the number of times of opening the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

Small hit end processing (step S90310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for informing the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in steps S90312 and S90314. Of these, FIG. 67(A) is a flowchart showing the first starting port switch passage processing of step S90312. Further, FIG. 67B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage processing of step S90314.

First, the first starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the first starting opening switch passage processing executed when the first starting opening switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, Whether or not the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of 1 pending storage is 4) is checked (step S901121A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212A), and at the same time, the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213A).

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (see FIG. 68) (step S901214A). .. In the process of step S901214A, a random number R'(random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1') that is a software random number, a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2'). And a variation pattern determination random number (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3') is not extracted in the first starting opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. ..

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (reserved storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the reserved storage. As shown in FIG. 68, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In the other embodiment, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R′ (a big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number and a big hit type determination random number (a random number 1 that is a software random number) are used. ′), fluctuation pattern type determination random numbers (random 2′) and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 3′) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to send the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901215A).

Next, the second starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. 67(B). In the second starting opening switch passage processing executed when the second starting opening switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second pending storage). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4 (step S901121B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S901212B) and, at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213B).

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second pending storage buffer (see FIG. 68) (step S901214B). .. In the process of step S901214B, a random number R'(random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1') that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2'). And a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3') is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the second starting opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to send the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901215B).

69 and 70 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, and if the customer waiting demo designation command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051A), and the processing finish. Note that, for example, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted in step S9051A, the CPU 9056 sets a customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after transmitting the customer wait demo designation command, the customer wait demonstration customer command is repeated based on that the customer wait demo designation command transmitted flag is set. It may be controlled not to send the demo designation command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the second pending storage number (step S9052). Specifically, the value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). The data indicating the "second" is set to (step S9053). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 9056 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

By performing the processing of steps S9052 to S9054, in this other embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. Not limited to the modes shown in the other embodiments, the first special winning symbol 9013 and the second special winning symbol 9014 are displayed in the order of winning in the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display. It may be configured to execute.

Next, in the RAM 9055, the CPU 9056 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number =1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, the CPU 9056, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the content of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

That is, the CPU 9056, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved memories=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S9058). The CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current game state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the probability variation state background designation command when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the time saving state background designation command when only the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to send the normal state background designating command.

Note that, specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 9056 sets the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) according to the effect control command. Set it to a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In addition, in this other embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command, or the second command is set for each timer interrupt. The reserved storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in the order. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, first, a background designation command is transmitted, a variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, a display result designation command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and further 4 ms has elapsed. The first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol is started, a symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed targeting the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first special symbol indicating that the process is executed "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processes of steps S90300 to S90310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R′ (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for the big hit determination that is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Read the random number and judge the big hit. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 62) with a jackpot determination random number, and if they match, executes processing to determine a jackpot or a jackpot. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is the probable variation state, the probability of being the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is the non-probability variation state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, a large variation determination big hit determination table (table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 62A in ROM 9054 are set) in which a large number of big hit determination values are set in advance, and the number of big hit determination values An ordinary big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 62A in the ROM 9054 are set) which are set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability variation time jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination table for normal time is used to perform the jackpot determination process. That is, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the random number for random determination (random R') matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 62(A). When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. It should be noted that determining whether or not to be a big hit is to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether or not to make a stop symbol in the special symbol display device a big hit symbol But also.

The confirmation as to whether or not the current game state is the probability variation state is performed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability variation state, and reset when ending the probability variation state. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability variation jackpot" or "a sudden variation jackpot" and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. After the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 62B and 62C). Use to perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R') matches the small hit determination value shown in FIGS. 62B and 62C, the CPU 9056 determines to make a small hit for the special symbol. .. In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 62B. ) Is used to decide whether to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 62(C). .. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

If the value of the random R′ does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step S9062), that is, if the value is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step S9075.

In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to any of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 62D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 selects the big hit type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 62(E).

Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type (“normal jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, “ "Sudden variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot") is determined as the type of jackpot (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. The random number for use is read and the jackpot type is determined. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 62D and 62E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the probability of sudden probability jackpot being selected is high.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “sudden change big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 9056 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is the deviating symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of the big hit symbols "1", "3", and "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "a sudden change jackpot", "1" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "normal jackpot" is determined, "3" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. However, when the "probability variation big hit" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the big hit type is first determined, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big symbol type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is However, the present invention is not limited to those shown in the other embodiments. For example, prepare a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type in advance, and first determine the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, and the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. The type may also be determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9081). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects one of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables as a table used to determine one of the plurality of kinds of fluctuation pattern types (step). S9082). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9083). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used for determining the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S9084). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

If the small hit flag is also not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S9085). The time saving flag is set when the gaming state is changed to the probability changing state or the time saving state, and is reset when ending the time saving state. Specifically, when it is determined to be the "normal big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in the other embodiments) is finished. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display for the predetermined number of times is finished. Further, when it is determined that the "probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit", the probability variation flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability variation flag.

If the time saving flag has not been set (N in step S9085), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S9086). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S9086), the CPU 9056 determines that the fluctuation pattern type for out-of-normal use is a table to be used for determining the fluctuation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S9087). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9086), the CPU 9056 uses the shortening variation pattern for out-of-edge as a table used to determine any one of a plurality of variation pattern types. A type determination table is selected (step S9088). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9085), that is, when the game state is the probability changing state or the time saving state (in this other embodiment, the time saving is always performed when the game state is shifted to the probability changing state. Since the state is shifted to the state (see steps S90169 and S90170), if it is determined to be Y in step S9085, there are cases of a probable variation state and cases where control is performed only in the time saving state). As the table used to determine the pattern type to any one of a plurality of types, the time-span out-of-range variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S9089). Then, the process proceeds to step S9090.

In this other embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9085-S9089, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type for out-of-range. The judgment table is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state, the time variation shortening variation pattern type determination table is selected. In this case, a variation pattern type including a shortened variation variation pattern may be determined as a variation pattern type in the process of step S9090 described later, and when a variation pattern type including a shortened variation variation pattern is determined, In the process of step S9092, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in this other embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be displayed.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out random 2′ (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) and selects it in the processing of step S9082, S9084, S9087, S9088 or S9089. The fluctuation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S9090).

Next, the CPU 9056 determines whether the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern determination table or a deviation variation pattern determination table as a table to be used to determine the variation pattern from any of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S9090. One of them is selected (step S9091). In addition, the random 3′ (random number for fluctuation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer), and the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S9091 is referred to The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S9092). When the random number 3'(fluctuation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern determination random number for generating the variation pattern determination random number 3'. The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9093). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9094).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055 (step S9095). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S9096).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 9056 transmits any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation effect control command (see FIG. 63) in accordance with the determined type of big hit, small hit, or loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90120). If not set, the process moves to step S90126. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S90121, S90122). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". .. Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S90123, S90124). Whether or not the “probable variation big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. .. Then, when it is neither "normal big hit" nor "probability variation big hit" (that is, "a sudden probability variation big hit"), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (step S90125).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90120), the CPU 9056 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S90126). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S90127). When the small hit flag is also not set (N in step S90126), that is, when it is out of alignment, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S90128).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90129).

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S901112). Whether or not the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined, for example, in step S901112 described later by the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage. When the number subtraction designation command is transmitted, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag indicating that the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted is set, and in step S901121. It is only necessary to confirm whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Further, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set to be reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot ending processing, which will be described later, when terminating variable display of the special symbol or terminating the jackpot. Good.

Next, if the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 issues the reserved storage count subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901112). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S901125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S901126), performs control to send a symbol finalization designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S90304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056, if set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state, and the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the time saving state. Is reset (step S90132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of the big hit is "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", a big hit start designation command (command A001(H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is the sudden probability big hit, the small hit/suddenly sudden big hit start designation command (command A002(H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). It is judged based on.

In addition, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time to notify that the jackpot has occurred in the effect display device 909, for example) in the timer before opening the jackpot (step S90134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", 2 times in the case of "a sudden probability variation big hit") is set in the special winning opening release counter (step S90135). .. Also, the round time per round in the big hit game is set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 second, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probability big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S90305) (step S90136).

If the big hit flag is not set in step S90131, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the hour/hour count counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the hour/short state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the hour/hour counter by -1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the hour/hour counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the hour/hour flag (step S90140).

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 transmits a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit start command (command A002(H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). In addition, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to a small hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 909 is notified that a small hit has occurred) in the big winning opening pre-opening timer (step S90143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening opening counter (step S90144). Also, the opening time for each big winning opening in the small hit game is set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds, which is the same as the round time for the sudden change big hit, is set as the opening time for each big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit start preprocessing (step S90308) (step S90145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90146).

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit ending display timer is set (step S90160), and if the big hit ending display timer is set, moves to step S90164. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S90161), and the big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S90162). Here, if it is a "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", the big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is "a sudden probability variation big hit", a small hit/a sudden variation sudden big hit. An end designation command (command A302(H)) is transmitted. Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) (step S90163), and the process ends.

In step S90164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step S90164). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot to be finished this time is a normal jackpot (step S90166). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". .. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time saving counter (step S90168).

If it is not a normal big hit (that is, if it is a probability big hit or a sudden probability big hit), the CPU 9056 sets the probability change flag to shift to the probability change state (step S90169) and sets the time saving flag to shift to the time saving state. (Step S90170).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90171).

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, The variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, in the case of shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 9056 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) which the special symbol pointer indicates. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, The stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts execution of main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control is performed (step S90701). ..

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the production control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the production display device 909 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process processing, in each process according to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected, and in the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909. Display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S90707). After that, the process moves to step S90702.

78 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is composed of the 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area to store the received command is used. The command reception number counter has a value of 0-11. The ring buffer format is not always required.

79 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S90618).

If the received production control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the production control CPU 90101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620).

If the received effect control command is the big hit start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the big hit start designation command reception flag (step S90622).

If the received production control command is a small hit/suddenly probable variation jackpot start designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a small hit/suddenly probable variation jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S90624).

If the received effect control command is the big hit end designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90626).

If the received production control command is the small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S90629). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

80 is a flow chart showing the effect control process process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. 77. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 90101 performs any one of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the production control process process, the display state of the production display device 909 is controlled and the variable display of the production symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the production symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process.

Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect design fluctuation start process (step S90801).

Production symbol variation start processing (step S90801): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (step S90802).

Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S90802): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect design fluctuation stop processing (step S90803).

Production symbol variation stop processing (step S90803): The variation of the production symbol is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the display result (stopped symbol) is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the variable time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 909. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

Processing during round (step S90805): Display control during round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S90807).

Post-round processing (step S90806): display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

Big hit end production processing (step S90807): In the production display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

81 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 80. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect design variation start process (step S90801) (step S90813).

82 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 80. In the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S908000). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step S908000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step S908001). When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90101, in step S908001, creates a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence. , A combination of a big hit design that does not reach and one design that is offset by one) are also determined. The effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 83, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 stops. As a design, the combination of the effect designs in which the three designs have the same even number is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates “probable variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. The combination of the effect symbols arranged in the same odd number symbol is determined.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 4 designation command or the display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "disappearance" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), combinations of effect symbols other than the above are determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. In addition, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The production control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical values are associated with each other, to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that reminds of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right sides are all the same symbol) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop design that reminds the user of disengagement is called a disengagement design. In addition, a design that evokes a probability change state (in this other embodiment, an odd number pattern) is also called a probability change pattern, and a design that evokes that it does not become a probability change state (in other embodiments, an even pattern) Is also called an uncertain variation pattern.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a specific effect setting process that determines whether or not to execute the specific effect using the effect accessory 90201 and the type of the effect (step S908002).

Although not described in the other embodiments, various notice effects (for example, step-up notice effect, character notice effect, button notice effect, character notice notice effect are displayed during the variable display of effect symbols. , Group notice effect, mini character notice effect) may be configured to be executable. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process, the notice effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the type are executed, and when it is determined to execute the notice effect, the notice is given in step S908003 to be described later. The process table may be selected according to the performance.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step S908003). Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S908003 (step S908004).

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect display devices (effect parts) such as the effect display device 909 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect design are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table, and performs control for displaying effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 84 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (effect display device 909 as effect parts, effect parts). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 9027) as the effect parts is executed (step S908005). For example, a command is output to the VDP 90109 to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 909. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070 in order to output sound from the speaker 9027.

In addition, in the other embodiment, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control so that the effect pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the effect control CPU 90101 changes. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the pattern command.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908006).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect during the effect of design effect variation processing (step S90802) (step S908007).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process (step S908002) in the effect symbol variation start process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the variable display started this time is a big hit (step S905001). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. Alternatively, for example, the determination may be made by checking whether or not the variation pattern command read in step S908000 specifies a variation pattern for big hits.

If the variable display to be started this time is a big hit (Y in step S905001), the effect control CPU 90101 selects the big hit specific effect determination table as a table for determining the presence and type of the specific effect. (Step S905002). If the variation display to be started this time is not a big hit (N in step S905001), the effect control CPU 90101 selects the specific effect determination table for outliers as the table for determining the presence and type of the specific effect. (Step S905003). Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the lottery process based on the random number by using the specific effect determination table selected in steps S905002 and S905003, and determines the presence or absence and the type of the specific effect (step S905004).

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the specific effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 86(A) shows a specific example of the special effect determination table for the big hit selected in step S905002. In addition, FIG. 86(B) shows a specific example of the out-specification special effect determination table selected in step S905003. As shown in FIG. 86, in the specific effect determination table, determination values are assigned to no specific effect, specific effect A, specific effect B, and specific effect C, respectively.

In this other embodiment, an effect of lighting and displaying the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201 is executed as the specific effect. In other embodiments, the specific effects A to A are included in the specific effect. There are three types, C, and the specific effect A is an effect in which the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 is caused to emit a white lighting color. Further, the specific effect B is an effect in which the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201 is caused to emit light with a red lighting color. In addition, the specific effect C is an effect in which the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 is made to emit light in a rainbow display (rainbow display) by sequentially changing the lighting color to emit light.

In addition, in this other embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, the suggestive effect suggesting the specific effect is executed, but as the suggestive effect, an effect of vibrating the push button 90120 is executed. As shown in FIG. 86, in the other embodiment, the vibration time of the push button 90120 differs depending on which type of specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect A is executed, the push operation is performed. The vibration time of the button 90120 is 1 second. When the specific effect B is executed, the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 3 seconds. When the specific effect C is executed, the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 86, in this other embodiment, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of the specific effect executed in the case of a big hit is higher than that in the case of a big hit. In the case where the specific effect is executed, the expectation degree (big hit reliability) for the big hit is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 86, in the other embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the specific effect B is executed at a higher ratio than in the case of a big hit. When the specific effect B is executed, the expectation level for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that in the case where the specific effect A is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 86, in the other embodiment, the determination value is assigned such that the specific effect C may be executed only when the big hit occurs, and the specific effect C is executed. It is confirmed that it will be a big hit. Therefore, when the specific effect C is executed, the expectation (big hit reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where it is configured to determine that a big hit will be determined if the specific effect C is executed is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode and it is a case where it is out. However, the specific effect C may be configured to be executable at a low rate, and at least when the specific effect C is executed, as compared to when the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed, the big hit It may be configured so that the expectation level (big hit reliability) is high.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the jackpot reliability is increased when the specific effect is executed, or the jackpot reliability is increased in the order of the specific effect C, the specific effect B, and the specific effect A. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the specific effect is executed, the reach reliability and the probability variation reliability are configured to increase, or the reach reliability and the probability variation reliability are configured to increase in the order of the specific effect B and the specific effect A. Good.

In addition, in this other embodiment, there is shown a case where there are three types of specific effects A to C as types of specific effects, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, one type or two types of specific effects. It may be configured such that only four types of specific effects can be performed. For example, a type of specific effect may be provided in which the effect LED 90202 provided in the effect character 90201 emits light in blue or green lighting color.

Further, in the other embodiment, the case where the type of specific effect and the vibration time of the push button 90120 have a one-to-one correspondence is shown, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a mode. For example, even if the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 1 second, the specific effect A is not always executed, and the specific effect B or the specific effect C may be executed at a low rate. You may comprise.

Further, in this other embodiment, the case where the vibration time of the push button 90120 is made different as the type of suggestive effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the type of suggestive effect, the strength of the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be different, the vibration speed may be different, or the vibration pattern may be different (for example, the push button 90120 is continuously vibrated). The vibration may be intermittently, intermittently oscillated, or intermittently oscillated). Further, the type of suggestive effect may be configured by combining the vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration speed, and vibration pattern of these push buttons 90120.

In addition, in this other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the presence or absence and the type of the specific effect or the suggestive effect are different depending on whether or not the jackpot is a big hit. I can't. For example, different specific effect determination tables may be selected depending on the type of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the presence or type of the specific effect or suggestive effect may be different. In this case, for example, the variation pattern including the super reach A is configured to be easier to execute the specific effect or the suggestive effect than the variation pattern including the super reach A, or the type of the specific effect or the suggestive effect having a high degree of expectation is provided. You may make it easy to select. In addition, for example, a variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-repetitions is configured to be easier to execute a specific effect or suggestive effect than a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-repetitions, or a type of specific effect or suggestive effect with a high degree of expectation is selected. It may be configured easily.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the suggestive effect is always executed when the specific effect is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in FIG. You may comprise so that the specific effect D which does not accompany the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as an effect may be provided. Further, not only the vibration operation of the push button 90120 but also the blackout display, the frame LED 9028 extinguishing, and the button LED 90360 lighting may not be performed, and any one of them may be displayed. The configuration may be such that a plurality or all of them are not performed.

Also, in this other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the presence and type of the specific effect and the suggestive effect are collectively determined in one lottery process, but the specific effect and the suggestive effect are shown. It may be configured such that and are determined by different lottery processes. Then, by determining the specific effect and the suggested effect by separate lottery processing, a pattern for executing both the specific effect and the suggested effect, and a pattern for executing only the specific effect (the specific effect should be noticed There may be a pattern to be executed) and a pattern to execute only the suggestive effect (so-called gasse pattern).

When it is determined to execute the specific effect (step S905005), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a specific effect execution flag according to the determined type of the specific effect (step S905006). For example, when it is determined to execute the specific effect A, the specific effect A execution flag is set, and when it is determined to execute the specific effect B, the specific effect B execution flag is set and the specific effect C is set. When it is decided to execute, the specific effect C execution flag is set.

87 and 88 are flowcharts showing the effect of the effect in the effect control process (step S90802). In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 90101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S908101), and also subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S908105).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not any of the specific effect execution flags (any of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) is set (step S908106). If none of the specific effect execution flags is set, the process moves to step S908126. If any one of the specific effect execution flags is set, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether it is the start timing of the dark display (blackout display) (step S908107). Whether or not it is the start timing of the dark display can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol variation start processing. If it is the start timing of the dark display (Y in step S908107), the effect control CPU 90101 starts the dark display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 (step S908108) and the frame LED 9028. Are turned off (step S908109). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

If it is not the start timing of the dark display (N of step S908107), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether it is the start timing of the suggested effect (step S908110). Whether or not it is the start timing of the suggested effect can be determined by, for example, checking the value of the variation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol variation start processing. Further, in this other embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the suggestive effect arrives at a timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the start timing of the dark display.

If it is the start timing of the suggested effect (Y in step S908110), the effect control CPU 90101 starts driving the vibrator motor 90126, and starts the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as the suggested effect (step S908111). .. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the vibration time according to the type of the specific effect in the vibration time timer for measuring the vibration time of the push button 90120 (step S908112). For example, when the specific effect A execution flag is set, a value corresponding to 1 second is set in the vibration time timer, and when the specific effect B execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is set to 3 seconds. Is set, and if the specific effect C execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is set to a value corresponding to 5 seconds. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the lighting display of the button LED 90360, and starts the lighting display of the push button 90120 as the suggested effect (step S908113). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the button LED 90360 is lit and displayed by executing the process of step S908113 is shown, but the button LED 90360 is not limited to such a mode and is displayed in a blinking manner. May be. Further, for example, the button LED 90360 may be made to emit various lighting colors or may be made to emit various lighting patterns, and the button LED 90360 is selected by lottery processing in accordance with the jackpot expectation degree, reach expectation degree, and probability variation expectation degree. It is also possible to determine which lighting color or lighting pattern should be used to emit light.

If it is not the start timing of the suggested effect (N in step S908110), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (step S908114). If the value of the vibration time timer is not 0 (N of step S908114), that is, if the push button 90120 is in the vibration operation, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the vibration time timer (step S908115), and subtracts. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the subsequent vibration time timer is 0 (step S908116). When the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (that is, when the vibration time of the push button 90120 is finished), the effect control CPU 90101 stops the drive of the vibrator motor 90126 and pushes as a suggestive effect. The vibration operation of the button 90120 is ended (step S908117), the lighting display of the button LED 90360 is ended, and the lighting display of the push button 90120 as a suggestive effect is ended (step S908118). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (Y in step S908114), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect (step S908119). Whether or not the start timing of the specific effect is reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol variation start process. Further, in this other embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the specific effect arrives at a timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 1 second) elapses after the vibration time of the push button 90120 is finished.

If it is the start timing of the specific effect (Y in step S908119), the effect control CPU 90101 starts the lighting display of the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 in the display color according to the type of the specific effect. Then, the execution of the specific effect is started (step S908120). For example, if the specific effect A execution flag is set, the effect that causes the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit a white lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the effect that causes the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light with a red lighting color is started. If the specific effect C execution flag is set, the effect LED 90202 provided on the effect character 90201 is sequentially changed in lighting color to emit light, thereby starting the effect of emitting light in a rainbow color display (rainbow display). To do. Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

If it is not the start timing of the specific effect (N in step S908119), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether it is the end timing of the specific effect (step S908121). Whether or not it is the end timing of the specific effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol variation start processing. Further, in this other embodiment, after the end of the vibration time of the push button 90120, the start time of the specific effect arrives at the timing when a predetermined specific effect time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed. To do. The effect time of the specific effect is not limited to 5 seconds, and for example, the specific effect may be performed for 7 seconds or 10 seconds.

If it is the end timing of the specific effect (Y in step S908121), the effect control CPU 90101 ends the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 909 (step S908122) and changes the effect symbol display. Accordingly, the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is restarted (step S908123). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 ends the lighting display of the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201, and ends the execution of the specific effect (step S908124). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set specific effect execution flag (one of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) (step S908125). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the dark display (blackout display) is ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is restarted at the timing of ending the specific effect is shown, but the other embodiment is described. It is not limited to the embodiment shown in the form. For example, the dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be restarted during the vibration operation of the push button 90120 or at the timing of the end of the vibration operation, or the accessory LED 90202 of the performance accessory 90201. The dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be restarted at the timing of starting the lighting display of or during the lighting display. In addition, for example, after a specific time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after ending the specific effect, the dark display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be restarted. Conceivable.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the specific effect are the same regardless of the types of the suggestive effect and the specific effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if the suggestive effect or the specific effect can be executed at a plurality of execution timings, such as executing the suggestive effect or the specific effect during high-speed fluctuation, executing when the reach is established, or executing during the reach. Good. Further, in this case, for example, the jackpot expectation degree, the reach expectation degree, and the probability variation expectation degree may be changed according to the execution timing of the suggestive effect or the specific effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S908803) if the change time timer has timed out (step S908126) (step S908127).

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to step S908305. In this other embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare production is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the process of displaying the effect symbol stop symbol in step S908302 is executed. Without that, the process moves to step S908305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (delayed symbol, big hit symbol) (step S908302).

Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S908302 (that is, the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to step S908311. To do.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S908302 (Y in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S908304).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S908305). Whether or not one of the big hit start designation commands is received is specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the big hit start designation command set in the command analysis process is received, It can be determined by checking whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit/sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command has been received (small hit/sudden probability variation big hit start designation command reception flag) is set. If any of the big hit start designation commands have been received, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S908306) and selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S908307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit/suddenly-variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step S908308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1), the control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as effect parts, various lamps as effect parts, and speaker 9027 as effect parts) is executed (step S908309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag according to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800). The value is updated (step S908311).

Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the suggested effect and the specific effect will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect modes of the suggested effect and the specific effect. Note that in FIG. 90, the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), (3),....

As shown in FIG. 90(1), it is assumed that the effect display device 909 is performing variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and the execution of the specific effect is determined at the start of the variation. At the start timing of the dark display (blackout display), as shown in FIG. 90(2), the dark display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is started (see step S908108). All the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off (see step S908109).

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 90, the case where the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is completely darkened when performing the darkened display (blackout display) is shown, but this is only the case. Absent. For example, even in the dark display (blackout display), the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d is continuously displayed, or if it is configured to display some small symbol, The small symbol may be continuously displayed, or the right-handed display may be continuously displayed when configured to perform the right-handed display that suggests a right-handed operation. In this way, even during the dark display (blackout display), the information necessary for the progress of the game may be continuously displayed.

Next, at the start timing of the suggestive effect, as shown in FIG. 90(3), the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as the suggestive effect is started (see step S908111), and the lighting display of the button LED 90360 is started. The lighting display of the push button 90120 as a suggestive effect is started (see step S908113). In this case, when the push button 90120 is vibrated, the vibrated member 90303 inside the push button 90120 also vibrates, and the vibration of the vibrated member 90303 is emphasized and visually recognized.

Next, when the vibration time of the push button 90120 ends, as shown in FIG. 90(4), the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as a suggestive effect ends (see step S908117), and the lighting display of the button LED 90360 ends. Then, the lighting display of the push button 90120 as the suggestive effect is terminated (see step S908118).

Next, at the start timing of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 90(5), the lighting display of the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201 is started, and the execution of the specific effect is started (see step S908120). ). In this case, for example, when the specific effect A is executed, an effect that causes the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit a white lighting color is started. If the specific effect B is to be executed, the effect that causes the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201 to emit light with a red lighting color is started. If the specific effect C is to be executed, the effect LED 90202 provided on the effect character 90201 is sequentially changed in lighting color to emit light, thereby causing the effect of rainbow display (rainbow display) to be emitted. To be done.

After that, when the production time (5 seconds in this example) of the specific effect has passed and the end timing of the specific effect comes, the lighting display of the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 is terminated, and the specific effect of the specific effect is terminated. The execution is ended (see step S908124). Further, the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 909 is also terminated (see step S908122), and the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is restarted in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbol (see step S908123).

As described above, according to the other embodiment, a rendering device capable of performing a rendering (in this example, a rendering accessory 90201) and an operable movable body (in this example, a push button 90120). With. Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5)) near the movable body using the effect device, and the movable object can be operated when the specific effect is executed. (In the present example, the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3)). Therefore, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

Specifically, in this other embodiment, since the effect character object 90201 as the effect device is provided below the game area 907, the light emission of the character object LED 90202 of the effect character object 90201 is not conspicuous to some extent. However, before the light emission, the player does not know which area of the game area 907 the player should pay attention to, and the effect of the specific effect may not be sufficiently obtained. Therefore, in this other embodiment, a push button that vibrates by operating (moving in this example) a movable body (in this example, push button 90120) provided in the vicinity of the performance accessory 90201. By directing the attention to 90120, the player's line of sight can be guided to the specific effect, and the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

In addition, in the other embodiment, specifically, "when the specific effect is executed" means that a predetermined time (in this example, 1 second) elapses after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is completed. The specific effect is executed at the timing. As described above, the specific effect may be executed after a relatively short time (in this example, 1 second) has passed after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is completed, or the vibration of the push button 90120 is performed. The operation and the specific effect may be executed at exactly the same timing, or the vibration time of the push button 90120 and the effect period of the specific effect partially overlap (for example, after starting the vibration operation of the push button 90120, The execution of the specific effect is started during the vibration operation). As described above, "when the specific effect is executed" means that at least the vibration operation of the push button 90120 and the specific effect are performed even if the execution timings of the vibration operation of the push button 90120 and the specific effect are the same or different. It suffices that it is executed at a timing at which it can be recognized that and are being executed correspondingly.

Further, in the other embodiments, the case where the effect device (in the present example, effect character 90201) is provided on the game board 906 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect character used for the specific effect may be provided on the game frame in the vicinity of the push button 90120.

In addition, “the vicinity of the movable body” includes, for example, an area A in which the effect display device 909 is provided, an area B in which the effect accessory 90201 is provided, and a push button 90120. When the area is the area C, the distance between the areas BC may be shorter than the distance between the areas AB. With such a configuration, since the effect character 90201 is provided in a region where the distance from the push button 90120 is shorter than the distance from the effect display device 909, which the player's line of sight seems to normally face, The line of sight of the player can be effectively guided.

In addition, the “vicinity of the movable body” may be configured such that the distance between the areas BC is shorter than the size of the display screen of the effect display device 909, for example. For example, when the size of the display screen of the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device) is 15 inches (38.1 cm), the distance between the regions BC is configured to be less than 38.1 cm. Good. With such a configuration, since the effect character 90201 and the push button 90120 are arranged in an area smaller than the size of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909, which the player usually pays attention to, the effect of the player is reduced. The line of sight can be effectively guided.

In addition, in this other embodiment, as a mode of the effect device near the movable body, a case where the effect accessory 90201 is provided relatively close to the push button 90120 via the out port 9026 is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect member 90201 may be provided immediately above the push button 90120 even on the game area 907. As described above, the effect character is provided on the game frame near the push button 90120. The object 90201 may be provided. Further, a movable body such as the push button 90120 and the performance accessory 90201 may be integrally configured. As described above, the “near the movable body” means that the movable body such as the push button 90120 is provided at such a distance that the player's line of sight can be guided to the specific effect using the effect member 90201. Good.

In addition, in the other embodiment, the case where the effect device used for the specific effect is the effect accessory 90201 including the accessory LED 90202 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a lamp/LED provided in a specific area as a rendering device, a sub liquid crystal display device, or the like may be used to execute the specific rendering in some form.

In addition, although the case where the movable body is the push button 90120 is shown in the other embodiment, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the movable body may be configured to include a movable member that can move within a predetermined operation range, and the suggestive effect may be executed by operating a movable member provided near the effect device. ..

Further, according to this other embodiment, the specific effect can be executed after the movable body is operated (in this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3), FIG. The specific effect shown in 5) is executed). Therefore, attention can be paid to the specific effect before the start of the specific effect.

In addition, in this other embodiment, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is stopped, a predetermined time (in this example, 1 second) elapses, and then a character product LED 90202 of the performance product 90201 is lit and displayed. Although the case where execution is started is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the vibrating operation of the push button 90120 may be terminated after the accessory LED 90202 of the performance accessory 90201 is lit and displayed during the vibrating operation of the push button 90120. Even with such a configuration, since the vibrating operation of the push button 90120 has already started before the start of the specific effect, the specific effect can be focused on before the start of the specific effect. Further, for example, at the same time as the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is stopped, the accessory LED 90202 of the effect accessory 90201 may be lit and displayed, and execution of the specific effect may be started, and various modes are possible.

In addition, in this other embodiment, after the dark display (blackout display) on the effect display device 909 is started, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is started after a predetermined time (in this example, 1 second) has elapsed. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the vibrating operation of the push button 90120 may be started at the same time as the dark display (blackout display) or the turning off of the frame LED, and various modes are possible.

Moreover, according to this other embodiment, the movable body is an operation means (push button 90120 in this example) that can be operated by the player, and vibrates the operation means when the specific effect is executed. (In this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 90(3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 90(5) is executed). Further, the operating means includes a decorative member (in this example, a vibrated member 90303 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56) whose vibration operation can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to a specific effect by sight and touch.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the decorative member (in this example, the vibrated member 90303) is included in the push button 90120 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the push button 90120 does not necessarily have to be built in, and some decorative member may be provided near the push button 90120. Then, for example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is transmitted, and the decoration member provided in the vicinity thereof may also be configured to vibrate. It is sufficient that the vibration operation of the push button 90120 can be emphasized in such a manner as described above.

According to another embodiment, the display means is displayed in a dark state when the specific effect is executed (in the present example, the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is displayed as shown in FIG. 90(2)). Dark display (blackout display)). In addition, the movable body can be operated in a state in which the light emitter for production (frame LED 9028 in this example) is turned off (in this example, as shown in FIG. 90(3), the effect display device 909 goes dark). The push button 90120 is vibrated while all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off (blackout display). Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be more effectively guided to the specific effect. Specifically, in this other embodiment, the effect display device 909 is displayed in the dark (blackout display) and nothing is displayed, and the frame LEDs 9028 of the game frame are all turned off. The vibrating motion can be made more conspicuous, and the player's line of sight can be effectively guided to a specific effect.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off as a light emitting body for effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is not necessary to turn off all the lamps/LEDs provided in the gaming machine, and it may be configured to turn off some of the plurality of lamps/LEDs. One lamp/LED (for example, a light emitting area) However, it may be configured to turn off only the lamps/LEDs that are large and particularly noticeable. Further, in this other embodiment, even when the frame LED 9028 is turned off, the button LED 90360 of the push button 90120 is turned on to emphasize the push button 90120 when the suggestive effect is executed. Although shown, the button LED 90360 may be turned off while the frame LED 9028 is off.

Moreover, according to this other embodiment, the movable body is moved by a plurality of types of operation modes including at least a first operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 1 second) and a second operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 3 seconds). It can be operated (see FIG. 86). Then, the execution mode of the specific effect is different between the case where the movable body is operated in the first operation mode and the case where the movable body is operated in the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 86, vibration time 1 The specific effect A is executed when the push button 90120 vibrates for seconds, and the specific effect B is executed when the push button 90120 vibrates for 3 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the movable body.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the type of the specific effect to be executed is different depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 90120) has been shown. I can't. For example, the presence/absence of execution of the specific effect may be configured to vary depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 90120). In this way, the execution mode (presence/absence of execution and type) of the specific effect may be changed in some form depending on the operation mode of the movable body.

Other Embodiments 2.
In the first other embodiment, further, a predetermined display can be displayed in a predetermined area of the display area that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the predetermined area is displayed. May be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, a second other embodiment in which the gaze guidance effect is executable will be described.

In addition, in this other embodiment, a detailed description of a portion having the same configuration and processing as those of the first other embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from the first other embodiment will be mainly described. explain.

First, modes of the effect display device 909 and the accessory 9050 in the other embodiment will be described. The accessory 9050 is fixed to the game board 906 by screws (screws), an adhesive, or the like (not shown). The accessory 9050 is a member having an L-shaped cross section having a portion 9050A protruding forward from the game board 906 and a portion 9050B hanging downward from the tip of the protruding portion (see FIG. 92 and the like). As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the accessory 9050 covers the upper area 905B, which is a part other than the lower area 905A of the display area of the effect display device 909, from the front, as shown in FIGS. Therefore, the upper area 905B is a portion 9050B of the portion 9050B when the player views the effect display device 909 from the front (when viewed in the normal posture of sitting on a chair and playing a game) (when viewed in the first posture). It is a hidden region that is hidden behind and cannot be visually recognized, and cannot be visually recognized unless the player looks in from below (without taking the second posture). The display area of the effect display device 909 includes an upper area 905B and a lower area 905A (an area that can be visually recognized when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front).

In addition, in this other embodiment, the notice design variation start process (step S90801) of the production control process process is executed, and when it is decided to execute the notice effect, the production symbol change. In step S908003 of the start process, the process table corresponding to the notice effect is selected, and the process of step S908005 of the effect symbol variation start process and the effect of the effect symbol variation process (step S90802) are executed according to the process table according to the notice effect. As a result, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation of the super reach, the degree of expectation of the big hit, etc. is executed (see FIGS. 93 to 95). The notice effect is an effect of displaying a mini image, and a combination of the displayed mini images gives a notice of the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit. The notice production is executed before the reach is established. In this other embodiment, mini images A to C are prepared as the mini images displayed in the notice effect (see FIG. 93 and the like). Note that each mini-image moves on a different route (see FIG. 93).

In the display area of the effect display device 909, areas Z901 to Z903 are set as areas for displaying the mini image (see FIG. 94 and the like). One mini image may be displayed in each area. The mini image moves within the area Z901 if the displayed area is the area Z901, moves within the area Z902 if the displayed area is the area Z902, and moves the displayed area to the area Z903. If so, it moves within the area Z903.

The area Z901 is arranged at the boundary between the lower area 905A and the upper area 905B (see FIG. 94 and the like). Therefore, when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front, the mini image displayed in the area Z901 (moving in the area Z901) is hidden behind the accessory 9050 (the portion 9050B) or from the back of the accessory 9050. Appears to appear. Looking at such a mini-image, the player thinks that there may be something behind the accessory 9050 (upper region 905B) and tries to peek at it (the mini-image shows the player's line of sight at the top). Leading to region 905B).

The area Z902 is arranged in the lower left area (lower left area when viewed from the lower area 905A) (see FIG. 94 and the like). The mini image displayed in the area Z902 (moving in the area Z902) can always be visually recognized when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front.

The area Z903 is arranged in the right area (the area on the right side) of the upper area 905B (see FIG. 94 and the like). Since the upper area 905B is an area hidden by the accessory 9050, the area Z903 cannot be visually recognized when viewing the effect display device 909 from the front. The mini image displayed in the area Z903 (moving in the area Z903) is visually recognized by the line of sight being guided by the mini image displayed in the area Z901 (when the player looks down from below).

When only one type of mini image is displayed, the degree of expectation (probability) of execution of super reach is announced. Specifically, by displaying only one to three mini images A, the degree of expectation that the super reach A will be executed is announced. Similarly, by displaying only one to three mini images B, the degree of expectation that the super reach B will be executed is announced, and by displaying only one to three mini images C, the super reach is displayed. The degree of expectation that C will be executed is announced. The larger the number of mini images, the higher the degree of expectation (the execution rate of the corresponding super reach) (determined by 3).

When multiple types of mini-images are displayed, the jackpot expectation level is announced. Specifically, the mini image A and the mini image B are displayed, the mini image A and the mini image C are displayed, the mini image B and the mini image C are displayed, and the mini images A to C are displayed. All are displayed, and the big hit expectation degree is announced in advance for each combination. When the mini images A to C are displayed, the “big hit” is confirmed, and the big hit expectation is high in the order of mini image B+mini image C>mini image A+mini image C>mini image A+mini image C.

(Example of production screen)
Next, an example of an effect screen in this other embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. In FIG. 94 and the like, the downward arrows drawn in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R indicate that the decorative pattern is changing.

(Movement of mini image)
The mini-images A to C displayed in the areas Z901 to Z903 move as shown in FIG. For example, the mini image A moves diagonally back and forth (FIG. 93(A)). The mini image B moves so as to draw a square locus (FIG. 93(B)). The mini image C moves so as to draw a substantially triangular locus (FIG. 93(C)). In this way, the mini-images A to C behave differently. It should be noted that each of the mini images A to C makes the same movement regardless of which of the regions Z901 to Z903 is the display position.

(Example of the effect screen of the notice effect that gives the notice of the degree of expectation of super reach)
FIG. 94(A) is an effect screen when the notice effect for displaying the mini image A in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 is executed. FIG. 94(B) is an effect screen when the notice effect for displaying the mini image B in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 is executed. FIG. 94C is an effect screen when the notice effect for displaying the mini image C in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 is executed. In the notice production of FIGS. 94(A) to (C), since three mini images are displayed, the confirmation of the execution of the corresponding super reach is announced.

When viewing the effect display device 909 from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a front view), the lower part of the area Z901 and Z902 are visible, but the upper part of the area Z901 and the area Z903 are in the upper area 905B. It cannot be seen because it is hidden by the accessory 9050. The mini-image displayed in the area Z901 moves between the invisible upper part and the visually recognizable lower part, so that it is hidden or appears behind the accessory 9050 (the downwardly extending portion 9050B). Looking at the movement of such a mini-image, the player tries to look through the upper area 905B (particularly the area Z903) hidden in the accessory 9050 in the display area of the effect display device 909 from below (the player's The line of sight is guided by the movement of the mini image). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, since the area Z903 cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front, a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 and a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 and Z902. Have the same look of the notice effect in front view (the mini image is displayed in the area Z901 and the area Z902). Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether two mini-images are displayed or three mini-images are displayed (that is, whether or not the third mini-image is displayed), and the player sets the area Z903 as a character object. By checking from below 9050, it is confirmed whether or not three mini-images are displayed (that is, whether or not execution of the corresponding super reach is confirmed). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Similar to the above description, the notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 and Z3 and the notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in the area Z901 have the same appearance when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player looks through the area Z903 from the bottom of the accessory 9050 and confirms whether or not two mini images are displayed (that is, whether the corresponding super reach is likely to be executed or not). ) Confirm. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

(Example of staging screen for pre-announcement that predicts big hit expectation)
FIG. 95(A) is an effect screen when the notice effect of displaying the mini image A in the area Z901 and displaying the mini image B in the area Z902 is executed. FIG. 94(B) is an effect screen when the notice effect is displayed in which the mini image A is displayed in the area Z901, the mini image B is displayed in the area Z902, and the mini image C is displayed in the area Z903. In the notice production of FIG. 95, since the mini images A to C are displayed, the jackpot is confirmed.

As in the case of FIG. 94, the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 moves between the invisible upper part and the visible lower part, so that it is hidden or appears behind the accessory 9050 (the downwardly extending portion 9050B). Looking at the movement of such a mini-image, the player tries to look through the upper area 905B (particularly the area Z903) hidden in the accessory 9050 in the display area of the effect display device 909 from below (the player's The line of sight is guided by the movement of the mini image). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

As in the case of FIG. 94, since the area Z903 cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front, the notice effect shown in FIG. 95(A) and the notice effect shown in FIG. 95(B) have the same appearance of the notice effect in the front view. (Mini image A is displayed in the area Z901 and mini image B is displayed in the area Z902). Therefore, the player looks through the area Z903 from the bottom of the accessory 9050 and confirms whether or not the last mini-image C is displayed (that is, the variable display being executed is confirmed as "big hit"). Check if there is). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

(Effects of other embodiments)
As described above, according to another embodiment, the mini image can be displayed in the upper region 905B (here, the region Z903) that is hidden by the accessory 9050 and cannot be seen when viewed from the front (FIG. 94 and the like). Then, the player looks into the upper area 905B by the movement of the mini image displayed in the area Z901 (hidden behind the accessory 9050 or appearing from behind the accessory 9050. FIG. 94, etc.). As described above, in this other embodiment, the player's line of sight is moved to the upper region 905B (here, the region Z903) by the movement of the mini-image (which is hidden by the actor 9050 or appears from the actor 9050). It can be guided and the interest in games is improving. Note that such an effect in which the player's line of sight is guided (here, an effect by moving a mini image) is also referred to as a line-of-sight guidance effect.

Further, in this other embodiment, there are a plurality of types of mini-images (in particular, mini-images displayed in the area Z901 and the area Z903), and further, there are also a plurality of types of movements of the mini-images (here, mini-images). The movement varies depending on the type of image) (Fig. 93, etc.). As a result, the production is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, in this other embodiment, the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 constitutes a notice effect, and the expectation that the super reach will be executed or the jackpot expectation will be announced according to the type of the mini-image, etc. The player pays attention to the type of the mini image (that is, the player also pays attention to the aspect of the gaze guidance effect), and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In addition, the advance notice, that is, the combination of the mini-images displayed in the areas Z901 to Z903 (inside and outside the upper area 905B) gives advance notice of the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit. A mini image is searched for on the entire display screen of the display device 909. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, by hiding the upper part of the region Z901 and the upper region 905B including the region Z903 with the accessory 9050, the player is allowed to peep from below, so that the range of effects is broadened and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in this other embodiment, the appearance of the notice effect when viewed from the front (whether or not the mini image is displayed in the regions Z901 and Z902, etc., is also referred to as the execution form of the notice effect in the lower region 905A. It can be said that the contents of the notice announced by the notice production being executed (here, the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of the big hit) will not be known, and the player will be able to see the area Z903. You can understand it only after checking. Therefore, the effect of the notice production is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.

Note that it is possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the above-described first and second other embodiments. For example, when the configuration shown in the first other embodiment is applied to the configuration shown in the second other embodiment, a part of the liquid crystal display device (effect display device 909) is displayed on the game area 907. A mini image such as a character image is displayed on the back side of the accessory 9050 that is provided so as to cover so as to cover it, and a part of the mini image is displayed so as to protrude from the back of the accessory 9050 (for example, the character image in the area Z901. May be configured to be displayed or disappeared), and the accessory 9050 may be configured to vibrate and rattle. In this case, (1) the role object 9050 vibrates rattlingly to draw attention to the role object 9050, (2) then the character image that is displayed outside the region 1 is focused, and (3) then the role It suffices that the player's line of sight be guided step by step in the order of focusing on the character image displayed in the area Z903 hidden behind the object 9050.

In addition, in the other embodiments described above, the change time and the type of reach production, presence/absence of pseudo-relation (production in which temporary stop and re-change of symbols are executed once or more during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode, one variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of variation, but the variation pattern is defined by two or more commands. The effect control microcomputer 90100 may be notified. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether the first command is presence/absence of pseudo-relation, presence/absence of sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and as the second command, such as the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery production, after the time when the reach is reached (when the reach is not reached, the so-called You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time after the 2nd stop and a fluctuation mode. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 may notify the variation time with each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 may select a specific variation mode executed at each timing. .. When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after transmitting the first command (for example, A second command may be sent (in the timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned other embodiments, "the ratio is different" means that the ratio is different because of the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. However, it is also a concept that includes a relationship such that A:B=100%:0% and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

Further, in the other embodiment described above, a case is shown in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and normal symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed as a derivative, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be one.

Further, in the above-described other embodiments, a pachinko machine is used as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is configured such that a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of game machines are operated according to the operation lever operation. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are rotated according to the operation of the stop button by the player when the symbols are stopped, a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to apply.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, but encloses game media such as game balls and gives a score when the prize giving condition is satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the type.

Further, in the other embodiments described above, there is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit as a big hit type, and based on the fact that it was determined as a probability variation big hit as a big hit type, a gaming machine controlled to a probability variation state after the big hit game is finished is shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configurations shown in the above-described other embodiments to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in the probability change state after the end.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning a prize mouth 14 2nd start winning a prize mouth 18c Reserved memory display part 18d Active display part 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Performance control board 100 Microcomputer for performance control 101 CPU for performance control
109 VDP
901 Pachinko gaming machine 908a 1st special symbol display 908b 2nd special symbol display 909 production display device 9013 1st start winning a prize mouth 9014 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 909a 1st reservation memory display section 909b 2nd reservation memory display section 9020 special Variable winning ball device 9031 Game control board (main board)
9056 CPU
90560 Game control microcomputer 9080 Performance control board 90100 Performance control microcomputer 90101 Performance control CPU
90109 VDP
90120 Push button 90122 Stick controller 90126 Vibrator motor 90201 Performance character 90202 Character LED
90303 Vibrating member 90360 Button LED

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variable display,
A production device that can execute production,
A movable body that can move,
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device,
A movable body control means for operating the movable body,
A specific display unit capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display in a mode involving an operation, and a specific display unit capable of changing the display mode of the specific display;
Includes a suggested directing execution means, capable of performing the indicated effect suggesting a change in the specific display of the display mode,
The movable body control means is capable of operating the movable body when the specific effect is executed,
The specific display means, Ri changeable der the display mode of the specific display by a different percentage specific display operation mode when said indicating effect is executed,
Change determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the specific display has changed,
Further comprising an operation mode selection unit for selecting an operation mode of the specific display,
The specific display means displays a specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selection means,
The operation mode selection means,
As the operation mode of the specific display, it is possible to select either the first operation mode or the second operation mode in which the display position is changed more frequently than the first operation mode,
When the change determination means determines that the display mode is changed, and the unchanged specific display in which the display mode has not been changed is displayed, at a higher rate than when the unchanged specific display is not displayed. A game machine characterized by selecting the second operation mode .